SECTION OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "SECTION OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION"

Transcription

1 SECTION OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies. 2. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals shall be in digital form. A Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. B. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. C. Coordination-Study Report. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist. 2. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399. d. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable. 2. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. A Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer. 3. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION Page 1 o 5

2 4. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures. PART 2- PRODUCTS a. COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS 1. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. B. Prior Approved Equivalent. b. COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS Comply with IEEE 399. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-currentcharacteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots. PART 3- EXECUTION a. POWER SYSTEM DATA 1. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study: A. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other electrical Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings. B. Impedance of utility service entrance. C. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats, showing the following: a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type, impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material, insulation, and length OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION Page2 o 5

3 f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1. D. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following: a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping. b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability. c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve. d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers. i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays. j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical. b. FAULT-CURRENT STUDY 1. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuitbreaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following: A. Switchgear and switchboard bus. B. Motor-control center. C. Distribution panelboard. D. Branch circuit panelboard. E. Disconnect Switches F. Motor Starters G. Variable Frequency Drives 2. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions. 3. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current. 4. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION Page3 o 5

4 A. Transformers: a. ANSI C b. IEEE C c. IEEE C B. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C C. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C Study Report: A. Show calculated XIR ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram. 6. Equipment Evaluation Report: A. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. B. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. C. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. c. COORDINATION STUDY 1. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399. A. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. B. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents. 2. Comply with IEEE 241 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals. 3. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices: A. Device shall not operate in response to the following: a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual loading or emergency conditions. B. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C , for fault currents. 4. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P , ICEA P , and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION Page4 o 5

5 equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current. 5. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study: A. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices: a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup values. c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings. B. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information: a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point. 6. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices. END OF SECTION OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION Page 5 of5

6

7 SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Field quality-control reports. d. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS a. CONDUCTORS 1. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Bare Copper Conductors: A. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. B. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. C. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. D. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 A WG conductor, 114 inch in diameter. E. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 A WG, stranded conductor. F. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. G. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick GROUNDING & BONDING Pagel ofs

8 b. CONNECTORS 1. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. 2. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. A. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. 3. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. c. GROUNDING ELECTRODES 1. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. APPLICATIONS 1. Conductors: fustall stranded conductors unless otherwise indicated. 2. Underground Grounding Conductors: fustall bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 A WG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. 3. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands ofyellow. 4. Conductor Terminations and Connections: A. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. B. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. C. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. D. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. b. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING 1. fustall insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: A. Feeders and branch circuits. B. Lighting circuits. C. Receptacle circuits GROUNDING & BONDING Page2 of5

9 D. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. E. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. F. Flexible raceway runs. G. Annored and metal-clad cable runs. 2. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to ductmounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. 3. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. 4. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TWATIS J STD-607-A. A. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 A WG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. B. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus. C. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 5. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors. c. INSTALLATION 1. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. 2. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated. A. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any. B. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. 3. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures," and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover GROUNDING & BONDING Page3 of5

10 A. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. 4. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. A. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. B. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. C. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. 5. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: A. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. B. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. C. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. 6. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. d. LABELING 1. Comply with requirements in Section "Electrical Identification" for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green. 2. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed. A. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager." e. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: A. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements GROUNDING & BONDING Page 4 o 5

11 B. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. 2. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: A. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kva and Less: 10 ohms. B. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kv A: 5 ohms. C. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kv A: 3 ohms. D. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). 3. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION GROUNDING & BONDING PageS o 5

12

13 SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section includes: A. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. B. Construction requirements for concrete bases. b. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. c. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems. 2. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: A. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. B. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. C. Equipment supports. d. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Comply with NFP A HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Pagel o 5

14 PART 2- PRODUCTS a. SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS 1. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, fuc.; a division of Cooper fudustries. c. ERICO futemational Corporation. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation. e. Unistrut; Tyco futemational, Ltd. B. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. D. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4. E. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 2. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. 4. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. 5. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 6. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti fuc. 2) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., fuc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 3) Powers Fasteners, fuc HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page2 o 5

15 B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 3) Powers Fasteners, Inc. C. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. D. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. E. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTMA325. F. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. G. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. b. FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 1. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. APPLICATION 1. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. 2. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. 3. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. A. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. 4. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page3 o 5

16 b. SUPPORT INSTALLATION 1. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. 2. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. 3. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: A. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. B. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. C. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. D. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. E. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. F. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. G. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. H. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. 4. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. c. INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS 1. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 2. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. d. CONCRETE BASES 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 1 0 bolt diameters from edge of the base. 2. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page4 o 5

17 3. Anchor equipment to concrete base. A. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. B. fustall anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. C. fustall anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. e. PAINTING 1. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-P A 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. A. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PageS o 5

18

19 SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART!-GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section Includes: A. Identification for raceways. B. Identification of power and control cables. C. Identification for conductors. D. Underground-line warning tape. E. Warning labels and signs. F. Instruction signs. G. Equipment identification labels. H. Miscellaneous identification products. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. c. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Comply with ANSI A Comply with NFPA Comply with 29 CFR and 29 CFR Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. 5. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. PART 2 - PRODUCTS a. POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 1. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. 2. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: A. White letters on a black field: Utility Power B. Black letters on an orange field: Standby Generator Power ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Pagel o 6

20 C. White Letters on a blue field: UPS Power. D. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. 3. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. b. ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 1. Comply with ANSI Al3.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 2. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: A. White letters on a black field: Utility Power B. Black letters on an orange field: Standby Generator Power C. White Letters on a blue field: UPS Power. D. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type. 3. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. c. POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 1. Comply with ANSI Al3.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 2. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. d. CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 1. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. e. FLOOR MARKING TAPE 1. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay. f. UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE 1. Tape: ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 2 o 6

21 A. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. B. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. C. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. 2. Color and Printing: A. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z B. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. C. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE. COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE. 3. Tag: Type I: A. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. B. Thickness: 4 mils. C. Weight: 18.5lb/1000 sq. ft.. D. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf, and 2500 psi. g. WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS 1. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: A. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. B. 1/4-inch grommets in comers for mounting. C. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches. 3. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: A. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." B. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." h. INSTRUCTION SIGNS 1. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. A. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. B. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. C. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page3 o 6

22 i. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS 1. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV -resistant seal for label. 2. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. j. MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 1. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). 2. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 2. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completiq.g finish work. 3. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. 4. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 5. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. 6. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. 7. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page4 o 6

23 b. IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE 1. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. 2. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: A. Standby Generator Power: Black letters on an orange field. B. Utility Power: White letters on a black field. C. UPS: White letters on a blue field. 3. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. A. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. 5. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source. 6. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. A. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. B. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. C. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 7. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. A. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 5 of6

24 B. fustall underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables m raceway. 8. Workspace fudication: fustall floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. 9. Warning Labels for fudoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive warning labels. A. Comply with 29 CFR B. Identify system voltage with black letters on a yellow background. C. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. D. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. c. Panelboards. 10. Operating fustruction Signs: fustall instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. fustall instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. 11. Emergency Operating fustruction Signs: fustall instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power distribution, power transfer, and load shedding. 12. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. A. Labeling fustructions: a. fudoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: fucrease sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Page 6 o 6

25 SECTION SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART!-GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section Includes: A. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. B. Sleeve-seal systems. C. Sleeve-seal fittings. D. Grout. E. Silicone sealants. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 -PRODUCTS a. SLEEVES 1. Wall Sleeves: A. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. 2. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. 3. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: A. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. B. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be inch SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Pagel of4

26 b. SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS 1. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc. B. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. C. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. c. SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS 1. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Presealed Systems. b. Prior Approved Equivalent. d. GROUT 1. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated walls or floors. 2. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C I 107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. e. SILICONE SEALANTS 1. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Page 2 o 4

27 A. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 2. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 1. Comply with NECA Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. 3. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: A. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. B. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. C. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. D. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. E. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. 4. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: A. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. B. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. 5. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. 6. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for l-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Page 3 o 4

28 7. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for l-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. b. SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION 1. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building. 2. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. c. SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION 1. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. 2. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. 3. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. 4. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. END OF SECTION SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING Page4 o 4

29 SECTION CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1- GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. This Section includes the following: A. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. B. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Field quality-control test reports. d. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2- PRODUCTS a. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and XHHW. 3. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire. b. CONNECTORS AND SPLICES 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. AFC Cable Systems, Inc CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 1 o 4

30 B. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. C. 0-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. D. 3M; Electrical Products Division. E. Tyco Electronics Corp. F. Prior Approved Equivalent 2. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS 1. Feeders: Copper. Stranded. 2. Branch Circuits: Copper. Stranded. b. CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS 1. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. 2. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 3. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC. 4. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN THWN, single conductors in raceway. 5. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 6. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC. 7. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. 8. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. 9. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 10. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page2 o 4

31 c. INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. 3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. 4. fustall exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. 5. Support cables according to Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 6. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section "Electrical Identification." 7. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 8. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 9. Wiring at Outlets: fustall conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. d. SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 1. fustall sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." e. FIRESTOPPING 1. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. f. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 2. Tests and fuspections: A. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page3 of4

32 B. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NET A Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 A WG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: A. Test procedures used. B. Test results that comply with requirements. C. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. 4. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page4 of4

33 SECTION CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1- GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section Includes: A. UTP cabling. B. RS-232 cabling. C. RS-485 cabling. D. Low-voltage control cabling. E. Control-circuit conductors. F. Identification products. b. DEFINITIONS 1. Low Voltage: As defined in NFP A 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits. 2. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity). c. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. d. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Field quality-control reports. e. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Maintenance data. f. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. A. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. B. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 1 of8

34 2. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. g. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 2. Test each pair ofutp cable for open and short circuits. PART 2- PRODUCTS a. PATHWAYS 1. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section "Raceways and Boxes." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. A. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and inches deep. b. BACKBOARDS 1. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section "Rough Carpentry." c. UTPCABLE 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. B. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. C. CommScope, Inc. D. Draka USA. E. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. F. KRONE Incorporated. G. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. H. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. I. Superior Essex Inc. J. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. K. 3M. L. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. M. Prior Approved Equivalent. 2. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP. A. Comply with ICEA S for mechanical properties. B. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. C. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e and Category CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 2 o 8

35 D. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFP A 70 for the following types: a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or Type CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX. e. Multipurpose: Type MP or Type MPG. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL d. UTP CABLE HARDWARE 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. B. Dynacom Corporation. C. Hubbell Premise Wiring. D. KRONE Incorporated. E. Leviton Voice & Data Division. F. Molex Premise Networks; a division ofmolex, Inc. G. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. H. Panduit Corp. I. Siemon Co. (The). J. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. K. Prior Approved Equivalent 2. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher. 3. Connecting Blocks: 110 style for Category 5e, 110 style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare; integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. Coordinate all termination requirements with equipment manufacturers. e. RS-232 CABLE 1. Standard Cable: NFP A 70, Type CM. A. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. B. Polypropylene insulation. C. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. D. PVC jacket. E. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain wire. F. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 3 o 8

36 A. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 A WG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. B. Plastic insulation. C. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. D. Plastic jacket. E. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 A WG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain wire. F. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. f. RS-485 CABLE 1. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM. A. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 A WG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. B. PVC insulation. C. Unshielded. D. PVC jacket. E. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. A. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. B. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. C. Unshielded. D. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. E. Flame Resistance: NFP A 262, Flame Test. g. LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE 1. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. A. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. B. PVC insulation. C. Unshielded. D. PVC jacket. E. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. A. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. B. PVC insulation. C. Unshielded. D. PVC jacket. E. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFP A 262. h. CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS 1. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with UL CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page4 of8

37 2. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with UL Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF, complying with UL 83. i. IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Brady Corporation. B. HellermannTyton. C. KroyLLC. D. Panduit Corp. E. Prior Approved Equivalent. 2. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. 3. Comply with requirements in Section "Electrical Identification." PART 3- EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS 1. Comply with TWEIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. 2. Comply with requirements in Section "Raceways and Boxes" for installation of conduits and wireways. 3. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible. 4. Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms: A. Position conduit ends adjacent to a comer on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed or in the comer of room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. B. Secure conduits to backboard if entering room from overhead. C. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. D. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. 5. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free comers and joints CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 5 of8

38 b. INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1. Comply with NECA General Requirements for Cabling: A. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." B. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. C. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. E. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. F. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. G. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. 3. UTP Cable Installation: A. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. B. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. 4. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors: A. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section "Raceways and Boxes." 5. Separation from EMI Sources: A. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. B. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kv A: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kva: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kv A: A minimum of 24 inches. C. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 6 of8

39 a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kv A: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kv A: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kv A: A minimum of 12 inches. D. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kv A: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kv A: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kv A: A minimum of 6 inches. E. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kv A or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. F. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. c. REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. d. CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS 1. Minimum Conductor Sizes: A. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No 14 AWG. B. Class 2low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. C. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No 12 AWG. e. FIRESTOPPING 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." 2. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. f. GROUNDING 1. For data communications wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. 2. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section "Grounding and Bonding." g. IDENTIFICATION 1. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIAIEIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification." CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 7 o 8

40 h. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform tests and inspections. 2. Tests and Inspections: A. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TWEIA-568-B.l. B. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. C. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TWEIA-568- B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 3. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. 4. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 5. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES Page 8 o 8

41 16123 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1- GENERAL a. The extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by plan drawings and schedules. Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this section includes the following: 1. Copper conductors. 2. Service-entrance cable. 3. Shielded nonmetallic-sheathed cable. 4. Switchboard wires. 5. Split-bolt connectors. 6. Wirenut connectors. b. Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for project are as follows: 1. For power distribution circuits. 2. For lighting circuits. 3. For motor branch circuits. 4. For intercommunication and paging circuits. 5. For grounding. 6. For instrumentation and control systems. PART 2- QUALITY CONTROL a. National Electrical Code (NEC): Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction, installation and color coding of electrical wires and cables. b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std 83, "Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables," and Std 486A. "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide wiring/cabling and connector products which are UL listed and labeled. c. NEMAJICEA: Comply with all applicable requirements of the following publications: 1. Comply with NEMAIICEA Std Pub/No. 's WC 5, "Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy." 2. Pub/No. WC-30, "Color Coding of Wires and Cables," pertaining to electrical power type wires and cables. 3. Pub/No. S "Cross-Linked Thermosetting Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable." 4. Pub/No. S , "Ethylene-Propylene Rubber Insulated for Power Cables." d. IEEE: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Stds 82, "Test Procedures for Impulse voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors" and Std 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to wiring systems WIRES AND CABLES Page 1 of 8

42 e. A.S.T.M.: Comply with applicable requirements of A.S.T.M. BI, 2, 3, 8 and D-753. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20C (68F). PART 3- REQUIRED SUBMITTALS a. Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wires, cables, connectors and splices. b. Submit proposed methods for cable termination and splicing. PART 4- MATERIALS a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers for each type of wire and cable: American Insulated Wire Corp. American Wire and Cable Co. Cerro Wire and Cable Corp. General Cable Corporation. Rome Cable Corp. Southwire Company or Approved Equivalent b. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers for each type of connector: Square D. Company or Approved Equivalent 1. WIRES and CABLES a. General: Provide electrical wires, cables, and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation, and for application indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20C (68F). b. Building Wires: Provide factory-fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. Utilize the following UL-type wires with construction features which fulfill project requirements as indicated or specified: 1. Type THWN: For dry and wet locations; max operating temperature 75C (167F). Insulation, flame-retardant, moisture and heat-resistant, thermoplastic; outer covering, nylon jacket; conductor, annealed copper. 2. Type XHHW: For dry locations; max operating temperature 90C (194F). Insulation, flameretardant, cross-linked synthetic polymer; conductor, annealed copper WIRES AND CABLES Page 2 ofs

43 3. Type TBS: For switchboard wiring only; max operating temperature 90C (194F). Insulation, thermoplastic; outer covering, flame-retardant, nonmetallic covering; conductor, annealed copper. 4. Type MI: For wet and dry locations; max operating temperature 85C (185F). Insulation, magnesium oxide; outer covering, copper sheath; conductor, annealed copper. c. Cables: Provide UL-type factory-fabricated cables of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials and jacketing/sheathing as specified and required for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. NEC and NEMA standards. Utilize the following type cables with construction features which fulfill project requirements: 1. Type SE: Service entrance cable for aboveground installation; flame-retardant, moisture-resistant. 2. Type USE: Service entrance cable for underground installation; moisture-resistant, but does not have flame-retardant covering. 2. CONNECTORS a. General: Provide UL-type factory-fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards. b. Power Cable Connectors: The following guidelines shall apply: 1. Designed and sized for the specific cable being constructed. 2. Solderless, pressure-type connectors constructed of non-corrodible tin-plated copper. 3. Vinyl preinsulated ring tongue for wire sizes 12-2 AWG and uninsulated rectangular tongue for wire sizes mcm. 4. Rated current carrying capacity equal to or greater than the cable being connected. c. Control, Instrument and Specialty Cable Connectors: The following guidelines shall apply: 1. Designed and sized for the specific cable being connected. 2. Solderless, pressure-type connectors constructed of non -corrodible tin-plated copper. 3. Vinyl preinsulated type. 3. CABLESUPPORTS Cable supports of the type specified shall be provided for the following conditions: 1. Type "R" wedging plug for cables in vertical conduit risers- O.Z. 2. Basket-type wire mesh grip for cables in vertical tray or conduit risers WIRES AND CABLES Page 3 of 8

44 4. TERMINAL BLOCKS a. Terminal blocks for mounting in terminal boxes (TB's) shall be provided for as follows: 1. Designed and sized for the cables being terminated. 2. Phenolic block rated 600 volts. 3. Tubular screw-type contacts for power cables requiring no cable connectors and strap screw-type contacts for control and instrument cables having ring tongue cable connectors. 4. Rated current carrying capacity equal to or greater than the cable being terminated. 5. Marking strip. 6. Buchanan Extra-Heavy-Duty tubular screw-type for power cable 6 AWG and larger. Buchanan Heavy-Duty tubular screw-type for power cable 8 A WG and smaller. Buchanan Heavy-Duty strap screw-type for control and instrument cable. b. Terminal blocks for mounting in cabinets, panels, control boards, etc.: 1. Designed and sized for the cables being terminated. 2. Molded block rated 600 volts. 3. Binding screw-type contacts for power cables having ring tongue cable connectors. 4. Rated current carrying capacity equal to or greater than the cable being terminated. 5. MARKING STRIP Cable Identification Tags: 1. Nylon ties with identification tab. a. Thomas and Betts ''Ty-Rap" or Panduit "Sta-Straps", or Approved Equivalent. b. Heat stamp conduit number on identification tab or mark with pen using nylon marking ink. 2. If heat stamped, fill designations with black paint on natural nylon and white paint on colored tags. 6. WIRE or CONDUCTOR MARKERS a. Vinyl cloth with clear vinyl protective shield. b. Black printed numbers or letters on while background. c. Self sticking WIRES AND CABLES Page 4 of 8

45 PART 5 CONSTRUCTION 1. HANDLING a. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory-fabricated type containers, or wound on NEMAspecified type wire and cable reels. b. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. c. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is maintained. 2. INSTALLATION OF WIRES and CABLES a. Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements ofnec, NEMA, UL, and NECA's "Standard oflnstallation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices. b. Coordinate wire/cable installation work including electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary to properly interface installation of wires/cables with other work. c. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. d. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Soap cannot be used as a pulling lubricant. e. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway. f. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours, where possible. g. Keep conductor splices to minimum. h. Install splices and tapes which possess equivalent-or-better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. i. Use splice and tape connectors which are compatible with conductor material. j. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A and B. 3. POWER CABLE a. Install in conduit or duct system as indicated. b. Make splices and termination using kit materials acceptable to the cable manufacturer or as specified WIRES AND CABLES Page 5 of 8

46 c. Properly terminate and ground cable shield: 1. Ground cable shield at both ends. 2. Do not pass cable shield through ring-type current transformers. d. Fill all voids and round out sharp edges with 3M "Scotchfill" to eliminate points of high dielectric stress before applying insulating tape to terminal connectors, lugs and bus. e. Tape all terminal connections, lugs, bus and all other exposed current-carrying parts to equal or exceed insulation of cables of which they are a part with high-voltage tape. f. Apply adequate number of layers of half-lapped Scotch No. 88 all-weather vinyl plastic type with final overall application of approved electrical insulation varnish on each joint or connection after application of insulating tape. g. Insulating boots or heat shrink materials may be used instead of tape. h. Install without intermediate splices, unless indicated. i. Do not subject cable to pulling tension in excess of manufacturer's recommendations. j. Attach pulling grips over the cable sheath to prevent slipping the insulation. k. Do not subject cable to bending radius of less than 10 times the cable outside diameter during or after installation. l. Isolate from all lower voltage cables in pull boxes by steel dividers. m. Support at each connection so that any strain on the cable will not be transmitted to the connection. n. Install cable supports in vertical runs of conduit, at boxes and at terminations in equipment, and as required to meet the intermediate support requirements of the NEC. o. Properly fireproof throughout (except stress cones) all sections of each cable not enclosed in conduit or duct with Scotch brand No. 77 Electric Arc and Fire-Proofing tape, half-lapped. Then random rap with Scotch brand No. 27 tape as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, or approved equal, to prevent unraveling. Apply tape to cable as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. POWER (600 VOLTS and BELOW), CONTROL, INSTRUMENT, and SPECIALITY CABLE a. Install in conduit, duct, wireway, or cable tray as indicated or specified. b. Install metallic barrier in all tray and boxes to separate instrumentation from power and control circuits where run in the same tray or box. c. Install complete as indicated and as recommended by manufacturer WIRES AND CABLES Page 6 of 8

47 d. Install continuous between terminal points indicated without intermediate splices or taps unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. e. Make splices only in junction or terminal boxes. For control and instrument cables, splices shall be made on terminal blocks with marking strips. Maintain color coding on all splices. For power cable 6 A WG and smaller, splices shall be made on terminal blocks. For power cable larger than 6 AWG, splices shall be made using Crimp type connectors and taped. f. Do not subject cable to pulling tension in excess of manufacturer's recommendations. g. Attach pulling grips over the cable sheath to prevent slipping the insulation. h. Do not subject cable to bending radius of less than 8 times the cable outside diameter during or after installation.. i. Install cable supports in vertical runs of conduit, at boxes and at terminations in equipment, and as required to meet the intermediate support requirements of the NEC. j. Secure with cable ties in cable tray risers at intervals not to exceed 3 feet. k. Tie together with cable ties all single conductor cable on each individual circuit in each junction box, equipment or manhole, and in cable tray, at intervals not to exceed 6 feet. I. Clamp, snub and tie for proper support at each terminal block or connection so that any strain on the cable will not be transmitted to the terminal connections. m. Do not tie wires from different cables together. n. Attach a cable identification tag to each cable. 1. At each terminal to identify the circuit and cable. 2. Attach fiber tags with cable ties. o. Tag each individual conductor or wire with wire markers as follows: 1. With terminal designation indicated on schematic diagrams or given on manufacturer's equipment drawings. 2. At each terminal. 3. In addition to specified circuit tags. p. Terminate and ground, control, Instrument, and specialty cable shields as indicated and recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment being connected. In general, ground the shields at the control boards for control cables and at the receiving end equipment for instrumentation and specialty cables. q. Ground the shields at both ends for shielded control cable used in substations and switchyards WIRES AND CABLES Page 7 of 8

48 5. CABLE CONNECTIONS and TERMINATIONS a. Make up clean and tight to assure a low-resistance joint. b. Make only in terminal boxes, equipment or other accepted enclosures and not in conduit or cable tray. c. Install connectors with tooling manufactured by the connector manufacturer. Tooling shall be equal to AMP Special Industries, having die or piston stops to prevent over crimping and CERTI-CRIMP feature or DYNA CRIMP pressure relieffeature to prevent under crimping. The dies of all application tooling shall provide dot or wire size coding for quality control verification WIRES AND CABLES Page 8 of 8

49 SECTION RACEWAY AND BOXES PART 1- GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section Includes: A. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. B. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. C. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. D. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. E. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. F. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. 2. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: A. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. HV AC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS a. METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS 1. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 1 o 10

50 A. Comply with NEMA RN 1. B. Coating Thickness: inch, minimum. 4. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. 6. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. A. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. B. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression. C. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. D. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. 8. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. b. NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. c. METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS 1. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 3R unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. A. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 2 o 10

51 d. NONMETALLIC WIREW AYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS 1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defmed in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainlesssteel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. e. BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS 1. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. 2. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. 3. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. 4. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. 5. Metal Floor Boxes: A. Material: Cast metal. B. Type: Fully adjustable. C. Shape: Rectangular. D. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 6. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, rectangular. A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 7. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. 8. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 3 of10

52 A. Listing and labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 9. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMAFB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. 11. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. 12. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. 13. Gangable boxes are prohibited. 14. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 12 with continuoushinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. A. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. B. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. C. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 15. Cabinets: A. NEMA 250, Type 12 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel unless noted otherwise on drawings. B. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. C. Key latch to match panelboards. D. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. E. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. F. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. f. HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING 1. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: A. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. B. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two. A. Standard: Comply with SCTE RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 4 o 10

53 B. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with integral closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. C. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. D. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of0.50. E. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.". F. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. RACEWAY APPLICATION 1. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: A. Exposed Conduit: GRC. B. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. C. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. D. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. E. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated. A. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. B. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. C. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. D. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. E. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. F. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. G. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations. 3. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. 4. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. A. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB B. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 5 of10

54 installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. C. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB D. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. 6. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. b. INSTALLATION 1. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFP A 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. 2. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 3. Comply with requirements in Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. 4. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. 5. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. 6. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 7. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached. 8. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: A. Run conduit larger than l-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. B. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. C. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch of concrete cover in all directions. D. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location. E. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor. 9. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: A. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 6 of10

55 B. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. 10. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. 11. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. 12. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 A WG. 13. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. 14. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. 15. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFP A 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. 16. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: A. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. B. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. C. Where otherwise required by NFPA Expansion-Joint Fittings: A. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. B. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. C. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 7 o 10

56 D. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. E. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. 18. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. A. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. B. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. 19. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. 20. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box. 21. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. 22. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. 23. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. 24. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 25. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 26. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. c. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT 1. Direct-Buried Conduit: A. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. B. Install backfill as specified in Section "Earthwork." C. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section "Earthwork." RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 8 o 10

57 D. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor. a. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. E. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section "Electrical Identification." d. INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES 1. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No.4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. 3. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade. 4. Install handholes with bottom below frost line. 5. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. e. SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 1. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." t FIRESTOPPING 1. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." g. PROTECTION 1. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. A. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. B. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page9 of10

58 END OF SECTION RACEWAYS AND BOXES Page 10 oflo

59 16130 ELECTRICAL AND ACCESSORIES PART 1- GENERAL a. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals specified in this section include the following: Clevis hangers. Riser clamps. C-clamps. I-beam clamps. One-hole conduit straps. Two-hole conduit straps. Round steel rods. Lead expansion anchors. Toggle bolts. U-channel strut systems. Wall and floor seals. b. Equipment: Supports, anchors, sleeves and seals furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division sections. PART 2 - QUALITY CONTROL a. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting devices, of types, sizes and ratings required. b. National Electric Code (NEC) Compliance: Comply with NBC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. c. American National Standard Institute (ANSI)/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSIINEMA Std Pub No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies." d. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports, and equipment mounting. e. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL-listed and labeled. PART 3- REQUIRED SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions, for each type of support, anchor, sleeve and seal. Submit hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required hanger and support SUPPORTING DEVICES Page I of 4

60 PART 4 - MATERIALS 1. MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES a. General: Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. b. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: 1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with Yz'' dia. hole for round steel rod; approx. 54 pounds per 100 units. 2. Riser Clamps: For supporting 5" rigid metal conduit; black steel ; with 2 bolts and nuts, and 4" ears; approx. 510 pounds per 100 units. 3. Reducing Couplings: Steel rod reducing coupling, Yz'' x _";black steel; approx. 16 pounds per 100 units. 4. C-Clamps: Black malleable iron; 112" rod size; approx. 70 pounds per 100 units. 5. I -Beam Clamps: Black steel, 1-1/4" x 3/16" stock;_" cross bolt; flange width 2"; approx. 52 pounds per 100 units. 6. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting%" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; approx. 7 pounds per 100 units. 7. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting%" rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; %" strap width; and 2-1/8" between center of screw holes. 8. Hexagon Nuts: For Yz'' rod size; galvanized steel; approx. 4 pounds per 100 units. 9. Round Steel Rod: Black steel; 1/2'' dia.; approx. 67 pounds per 100 feet. 10. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; black steel; approx. 200 pounds per 100 units. c. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated or required, having the following construction features: 1. Lead Expansion Anchors: W'; approx. 38 pounds per 100 units. 2. Toggle Bolts: Spring head; 3/16" x 4"; approx. 5 pounds per 100 units SUPPORTING DEVICES Page 2 of 4

61 d. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes and materials indicated; and having the following construction features: Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. e. Conduit Cable Supports: Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non-armored type electrical cable in risers; construct for 2" rigid metal conduit; 3-wires, type wire as indicated; construct body of malleable iron casting with hot dip galvanized finish. f. U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16-gage hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated or required; with fittings which mate and match with U Channel: g. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide channel systems of one of the following: Greenfield Mfg Co., Inc.; Midland-Ross Corp. Power-Strut Div; Unistrut Div; GTE Products Corp.; or Approved Equivalent. 2. FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES a. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following: 1. Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal ; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6", 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage. 2. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs. 3. Iron-Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs. 4. Plastic-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs. b. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeve seals for sleeves located in foundation walls below grade, or in exterior walls, of one of the following: Rubber link seals tightened by stainless steel bolts and nuts. PART 5 - CONSTRUCTION a. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSIINEMA for installation of supporting devices SUPPORTING DEVICES Page 3 of 4

62 b. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. c. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings indicated. d. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal SUPPORTING DEVICES Page 4 of 4

63 16132 RACEWAYS PART 1- GENERAL The extent of raceways required by equipment and materials areas shown on the plans. Types of raceways in this section include the following: Rigid metal conduit. Rigid metal conduit with bonded PVC jacket. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. Rigid nonmetallic conduit. Underground plastic utilities duct. PART 2- QUALITY CONTROL a. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. Fbl - Conduit Fittings, Cable Fittings, and Accessories. b. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled. 1. UL-1 - Flexible Metal Conduit. 2. UL-6 - Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit. 3. UL-514- Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings. c. National Electric Code (NEC): Comply with requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. d. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with requirements as applicable to conduit and raceways. 1. C Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated. 2. C80.3- Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated. PART 3- REQUIRED SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each type of raceway required. PART 4 - MATERIALS 1. METAL CONDUIT Provide rigid metal conduit, and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where sizes are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways RACEWAYS Page I of 6

64 1. Each length of threaded conduit furnished with coupling on one end and metal or plastic thread protector on other end. 2. UL listed and labeled conduit on each length, fittings, and accessories. 2. RIGID METAL CONDUIT a. Conform to ANSI C80.1. b. Mild ductile steel, circular in cross section with uniform wall thickness sufficiently accurate to cut clean threads. c. Each length threaded on both ends with threads protected. d. All scale, grease, dirt, burrs and other foreign matter removed from inside and outside prior to application of coating materials. e. Galvanized by the hot-dip process as follows: 1. Interior and exterior surfaces coated with a solid, unbroken layer of 99 percent virgin zinc by dipping. 2. Coating not to show fixed deposits of copper after four 1-minute immersions in a standard copper sulfate solution. 3. One coat of zinc chromate finish on inside and outside surfaces to prevent oxidation and white rust. f. Couplings and elbows fabricated, coated and finished by the same process as conduit. 3. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING a. Conform to ANSI C80.3. b. High-grade manufactured to standards which assure maximum ductility. c. Exterior protected by electro-galvanizing process. d. Interior surface uniformly coated with lacquer or enamel. e. Final treatment of acid to form a corrosion-resistant coating of zinc chromate on galvanized f. Watertight compression-type fittings throughout. 4. RIGID METAL CONDUIT WITH BONDED PVC JACKET a. Hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit as specified for rigid metal conduit. b. Prior to application of PVC coating, clean interior and exterior surfaces to remove contaminants and treat with chromic acid to provide a suitable surface for bonding RACEWAYS Page 2 of 6

65 c. Adhesive of: Heat-polymerized, epoxy-acrylic, Approximately 0.5 mil thick, Cured by heating the conduit. d. Coated externally except for pre-threaded ends with PVC to a nominal40 mils, inch to inch. e. Uniformly coat around outside diameter and full length of the conduit. f. Exceed the tensile strength of coating with bond between metal and jacket. g. Couplings, elbows and other conduit fittings treated and coated with the same process as conduit. h. Each coupling and fitting to include a PVC sleeve that overlaps the conduit. i. Length of the overlapping sleeve equals diameter of the conduit or 2 inches, whichever is least. j. Final cured PVC coating capable of withstanding a minimum electrical potential of 2000 V. 5. LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT a. Liquid-tight conduit with flexible galvanized-steel core and a synthetic rubber, polyvinyl chloride or thermoplastic covering. b. Spiral encased copper bonding conductors for conduit in sizes 1-114" and smaller. c. External grounding jumper as required. d. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket, "Hi-Temp Liquatite Type H.T. Electri-Flex" where installed in low, -40 F, or high 220 F, temperature area as specified or indicated. e. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket, Type HA or Type O.R. "Seal-Tite" for oil-resistant applications. 6. NONMETALLIC CONDUIT and DUCTS a. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with applicable provisions of NEC for raceways. Provide underground duct systems complete with duct spacers, manhole hardware and "pulling in" rope. b. Bituminous Fiber Duct and Fittings: NEMA Stds Pub No. BC 1, Class 600. c. Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT): NEMA Stds Pub No. TC 2, Type 1, for encasement in concrete. d. Electrical Plastic Conduit (EPC): NEMA Stds Pub No. TC 2, Type 3, Schedule 40 PVC, for direct burial and informal above-ground duty. e. PVC Conduit and Tube: NEMA Stds Pub No. TC 3, match to conduit/tubing type and material. f. Underground PVC Plastic Utilities Duct: ANSIINEMA TC 6, Type I for encased burial in concrete, Type II for direct burial RACEWAYS Page 3 of 6

66 g. Underground ABS: ANSWERJNEMA TC 6, Type 1 for encased burial in concrete, Type II for direct burial. h. PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities: PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities duct fittings ANSI/NEMA TCO match to duct type and material. i. Conduit, Tubing. and Duct Accessories: Provide conduit, tubing and duct accessories of types, sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing. j. Underground Duct Systems: Provide as indicated and as follows: 1. Ducts for concrete shall be rigid metal conduit with bonded PVC jacket. Provide rigid steel, longradius elbows for all duct termination risers. 2. Polyethylene duct spacers of the interlocking type to provide the spacing indicated. 3. Reinforcing steel and concrete as specified in Division Hardware consisting of manhole frames and covers of type, size and load capacity indicated; pulling irons, steps, inserts, cable racks, and additional hardware as indicated or specified. 5. "Pulling in" rope constructed of nylon with minimum breaking strength of 2000 pounds. PART 5 - CONSTRUCTION a. Install electrical raceways where required and as shown, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation," and complying with recognized industry practices. b. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other work. c. Coat underfloor metal raceways with bitumastic type protective coating prior to placing concrete. d. Level and square raceway runs and install at proper elevations/heights. e. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cable-wires within raceways. f. Install PVC-coated metal conduit and fittings in highly corrosive atmospheres, beltpress room, lab, underground, and elsewhere as needed. g. Install flexible conduit only for lighting connections, above ceiling grid system where subject to movement and vibration, except as noted below. h. Install liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and for other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration and also where subjected to one or more of the following conditions: RACEWAYS Page 4 of 6

67 Exterior location. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. Corrosive atmosphere. Subjected to water spray. Subjected to dripping oil, grease, or water. Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water piping. i. EMT conduit in sizes of 2" or less may be used where concealed and where located within a building structure. EMT shall not be encased in concrete. j. Duct Banks: Install as follows: 1. Ducts: 2. Manholes a. Assemblies on spacers to maintain horizontal and vertical separation required. Spacer assemblies in banks of ductsshall be located at intervals not greater than 5'-0". Joints in adjacent ducts shall be staggered. Make duct joints watertight by application of joint sealer compound furnished by duct manufacturer. All rigid-steel conduit joints shall be made watertight by application of waterproof paint, Koppers' Bitumastic No. 50. Use no reinforcing steel or other ferrous material between individual ducts. b. Securely tie overall at 5 foot or closer intervals as required. c. Secure to anchors after assembling to prevent flotation when placing concrete. d. Slope as indicated with a minimum continuous slope of Vz percent. e. Align ducts for each 100 feet not greater than 4 inches horizontal. f. Install end bells flush with face of concrete at each manhole. g. Immediately after cleaning, install a "pulling in" rope in each duct. Plug each end of all ducts after cleaning. a. Construct with formed roof and walls to the dimensions and at locations required. b. Install inserts, pulling irons, other hardware items, and conduct as indicated. c. Provide ground rods and ground connections indicated and as required. d. Place masonry work as indicated. e. Excavation and trenching as specified in other Divisions. f. Forming, reinforcing and concrete: Place as specified in other Divisions. Do not place concrete prior to inspection and approval of duct and reinforcing installation by Owner or Engineer RACEWAYS Page 5 of 6

68 g. Cleaning: Rod and clean all ducts with suitable cleaners, swabs, and mandrels after completion of the duct bank. h. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. After concrete is placed for underfloor ducts, bring marker screws to finished concrete level to be used as screed when smoothing finished floor. Utilizing adjusting screws, bring up access unit tops to screed line (finished concrete level). 2. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and construction debris RACEWAYS Page 6 of 6

69 16138 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following: Outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, floor boxes, bushings, locknuts and knockout closures. PART 2- QUALITY CONTROL a. National Electric Code (NEC) Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. b. Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL) Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements oful 50, UL 514-Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL-listed and labeled. c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds/Pub No. 's OS 1, OS2 and Pub 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers and box supports. PART 3- REQUIRED SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer's data on electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with this specification. 1. RIGID METAL FITTINGS Heavy-Duty Cast Malleable Iron Fittings: 1. Mogul type for conduit sizes 1-112" and larger. 2. LBD or roller action type LB for right angle fittings for conduit sizes 2" and larger. 3. Full-threaded hubs and rubber-gasketed covers. 4. Zinc, cadmium-plated or bronze hardware bolts and screws for assembly. 5. Finish with cadmium-plated or galvanizing. 6. Standard and junction fittings. 2. CONDUIT EXPANSION FITTINGS a. Line of Conduit Type: 1. Galvanized expansion fittings for rigid conduit movement up to 4 inches. 2. Insulated metal bushing on ends of the conduit, bonding jumper, and with expansion head sealed with a high-grade graphite packing. 3. O.Z./Gedney Company, Type AX with Type AJ bonding jumper, or Approved Equivalent ELECTRICAL BOXES Page I of 5

70 b. End Type 1. For conduit terminating in a junction box. 2. Insulated metal busing on ends of the conduit, bonding jumper, and with expansion head sealed with a high-grade graphite packing. 3. O.Z./Gedney Company, Type EXE with Type BJ-E bonding jumper, or Approved Equivalent. c. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings 1. Provide for movement of%" from normal in all directions between two rigid conduits. 2. Integral bonding jumper. 3. O.Z./Gedney Company, Type DX., or Approved Equivalent. d. Conduit Wall Entrance Seals 1. Where required or indicated. 2. O.Z./Gedney Company, Type FSK, or Approved Equivalent. e. NEMA Type: Conform to NEMA Type I enclosure in all nonhazardous areas except as specified or indicated otherwise. f. Rigid Metal Conduit Boxes 3. INDOOR BOXES a. Hot-dipped galvanized steel. b. Galvanized steel covers. c. Cadmium-plated or bronze screws and bolts. d. For special boxes where it is not possible to provide hot-dip galvanizing, apply one package organic zincrich primer after SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning, at 3 mils dry film thickness. e. Minimum gauge requirements: No Surface Area Exceeds 1000 sq. In sq. In. No Single Dimension Exceeds 70 in. 60 in. Gauge Steel f. Conform to NEMA Type 1 enclosure in all nonhazardous areas except as specified or indicated otherwise ELECTRICAL BOXES Page 2 of 5

71 g. Include piano-hinged, gasketed cover and interior mounting panel where oil-tight JIC boxes are used for enclosing terminal blocks and control relays. h. Waterproof hubs in areas subject to moisture as indicated. 4. OUTDOOR BOXES a. 11-gauge minimum galvanized steel with drip lip and galvanized-steel covers fastened with bronze or cadmium-plated screws or bolts, or cast iron with galvanized finish and flanged bolted covers. b. For special boxes where it is not possible to provide hot-dip galvanizing, apply one package organic zincrich primer after SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning, at 3 mils dry film thickness. c. Threaded conduit entrances or rigid conduit hubs on all boxes. d. Rubber or neoprene gasket for cover. e. Conform to NEMA Type 3R enclosure in all outdoor installations unless indicated otherwise. f. Conform to NEMA Type 4 enclosure where indicated or specified. g. Cast NEMA Type 4 in lieu of sheet steel. h. Include piano-hinged, gasketed cover and interior mounting panel when used for enclosing terminal blocks and control relays. i. Oil-tight JIC boxes modified for NEMA Type 3R or Type 4 enclosure. 5. METALLIC BARRIERS a. Designed not to separate phases of a power circuit. b. Provide as indicated for the isolation of power circuits from other type circuits. c. Box size as required, or as indicated, for each particular installation. d. Include provisions for mounting cable supports where indicated, specified or as required by NEC. e. Provide where indicated or as required for cable pulling, junctions, terminals and for mounting of switches, outlets and control devices ELECTRICAL BOXES Page 3 of 5

72 6. FIBERGLASS BOXES a. Indoor and Outdoor Locations: 1. High-impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester formulation. 2. Have excellent chemical resistance and stability to high heat. 3. Removable enclosure cover with stainless steel captive screws. 4. Provide with hinged access door on all control or terminal enclosures. 5. Rubber or neoprene gaskets for door and covers. 6. Interior corrosion-resistant mounting plate when used for enclosing terminal blocks and control relays. 7. Conform to NEMA 4X enclosures in all outdoor installations. b. Box size as required by NEC or as indicated for each particular installation. c. Include provisions for mounting cable supports as indicated, specified, or as required by NEC. d. Provide where indicated for cable pulling, junctions, terminals, and for mounting of switches, outlets and control devices. PART 4- MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, provide bushings, knockout closures, locknuts and connectors of one of the following: SquareD Co. Carlon Products Div. OZ/Gedney Co. RACO Div; Harvey Hubbell Inc. or Approved Equivalent PART 5- CONSTRUCTION a. Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements ofnec and NECA's "Standard oflnstallation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. b. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring devices, and raceway installation work. c. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture ELECTRICAL BOXES Page 4 of 5

73 d. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. e. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. f. Avoid installing boxes back-to-hack in walls. Provide not less than 6" (150 mm) separation. g. A void installing aluminum products in concrete. h. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. i. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. j. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces. k. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. I. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. m. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage. n. During installation work, properly ground electrical boxes and, upon completion, demonstrate compliance with requirements of Section ELECTRICAL BOXES Page 5 of 5

74

75 SECTION WIRING DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section Includes: A. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. B. Weather-resistant receptacles. C. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. D. Solid-state fan speed controls. E. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors. F. Communications outlets. b. ADMINISTRATNE REQUIREMENTS 1. Coordination: A. Receptacles for Equipment Furnished by Others: Match plug configurations. c. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product. 2. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. d. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Field quality-control reports. e. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS a. MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: A. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper) WIRING DEVICES Page 1 o 6

76 B. Hubbell fucorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). C. Leviton Mfg. Company fuc. (Leviton). D. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). 2. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. b. GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS 1. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NFP A Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: A. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. B. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. c. STRAIGHT -BLADE RECEPTACLES 1. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). d. GFCIRECEPTACLES 1. General Description: A. Straight blade, feed-through type. B. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. C. fuclude indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. 2. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; d. Leviton; WIRING DEVICES Page 2 of 6

77 e. TOGGLE SWITCHES 1. ComplywithNEMA WD 1, UL20, andfs W-S Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 3. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A: 1) Single Pole: a) Cooper; AH1221. b) Hubbell; HBL1221. c) Leviton; d) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. 2) Two Pole: a) Cooper; AH1222. b) Hubbell; HBL1222. c) Leviton; d) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2. 3) Three Way: a) Cooper; AH1223. b) Hubbell; HBL1223. c) Leviton; d) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3. 4) FourWay: a) Cooper; AH1224. b) Hubbell; HBL1224. c) Leviton; d) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4. A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-LHl. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V. B. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off." f. WALL PLATES 1. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. A. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. B. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.04-inch- thick steel with chrome-plated finish. C. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel WIRING DEVICES Page3 o 6

78 D. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. 2. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. g. FINISHES 1. Device Color: A. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray unless otherwise indicated or required by NFP A 70 or device listing. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Coordination with Other Trades: A. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. B. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. C. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. D. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. 3. Conductors: A. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. B. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. C. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Device Installation: A. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. B. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. C. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment WIRING DEVICES Page4 o 6

79 D. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. E. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. F. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. G. When conductors larger than No. 12 A WG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. H. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. I. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. 5. Receptacle Orientation: A. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. b. GFCIRECEPTACLES 1. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. c. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform the following tests and inspections: A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL B. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. 2. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: A. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. B. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 3 percent or higher is unacceptable. C. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. D. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. E. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. F. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above WIRING DEVICES Page 5 o 6

80 3. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES Page6 of6

81 16155 EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 - GENERAL 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to all equipment. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the following: 1. To HV AC equipment. 2. From electrical source to motor starters. 3. From motor starters to motors. 4. To lighting fixtures. 5. To converters, rectifiers, transformers, inverters, variable speed drives, and similar current adjustment features of equipment, etc. 6. To grounds including earthing connections. 7. To master units of communication, signal, alarm. PART 2 - QUALITY CONTROL a. National Electric Code (NBC): Comply with applicable requirements ofnec as to type products used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices) for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches. b. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): Comply with Std.. 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to connections and terminations. c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with applicable requirements of ANSIINEMA and ANSI/EIA standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical connections for equipment. d. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Comply with UL Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connection products and materials which are UL listed and labeled. PART 3 - MATERIALS a. For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire-nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated EQUIPMENT WIRING Page 1 of 2

82 b. Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each type service. c. Wires, Cables and Connectors: 1. Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with appropriate Division basic electrical materials and methods section "Wires and Cables." 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for electrical connections which match, including sizes and ratings, of wires/cables which are supplying electrical power. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 C (61 F). 3. Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, wirenuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers of type services indicated. PART 4- CONSTRUCTION a. Install electrical connections as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices and complying with applicable requirements oful, NEC and NECA's "Standard oflnstallation" to ensure that products fulfill requirement. b. Coordinate with other work, including' wires/cables, raceways and equipment installation, as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment. c. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulating resistivity rating than, electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. d. Prepare cables and wires by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire. e. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance. f. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A. g. Fasten identification markers to each electrical power supply wire/ cable conductor which indicates their voltage, phase and feeder number in accordance with section "Electrical Identification." Affix markers on each terminal conductor as close as possible to the point of connection EQUIPMENT WIRING Page 2 of2

83 16220 SECURITY SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL a. The security system shall consist of smoke detector, transformer, I2 hour battery backup, PIR Detectors, programming keypad, cables, and system integration. b. The water plant and pumping station shall be monitored for unauthorized entry and fire. c. Security system shall be integrated into the SCADA system. d. All components shall be by same manufacturer and shall be United Security Products, Inc. (UPS), Honeywell, General Electric, or equivalent. PART2-SCHEDULE Water Treatment Plant- Lab/Office Building RAS/WAS Head works South Northeast Lab/Office Sludge/UV (Oxidation (Alternate Highway 36 Pump Item Building Building Ditch Only) Bid) Pump Station Station Smoke Detector 7 3 I Ceiling Mount PIR/ Glass Break Detector Entry Keypad I Main Controller I I Magnetic Door Contact Strip Sensors I PART 3 -COMPONENTS a. Smoke Detector shall be equivalent to DSC FSA-41 0 Series. b. Keypad equivalent to DSC PK55XX. c. Ceiling Mount PIR and Glass Break Detector equivalent to DSC Bravo 5 GB. One required. Locate one in office/laboratory. d. Ceiling Mount PIR Detector Levitron, DSC Bravo, or equivalent. Four required. Locate one in pipe/filter gallery, office/laboratory area, locate one in chlorine room, and locate one in soda ash room. e. Door/Window Opening - Magnetic Sensor equivalent to Powerhouse X I 0, Honeywell, or USP SECURITY SYSTEMS Page 1 of2

84 PART 4- INSTALLATION a. Contractor shall supply and install all components to make a complete and operable system. b. Training shall be provided for operator. c. At least one trip for 8 hours start-up shall be required. d. Battery backup system shall remain charged when 110 volt system is functioning. PART 5- BASIC FUNCTION Upon entry, the operator shall input a four digit code to inactivate system. Upon exit the operator shall input a four digit code to activate system. The operator shall have one minute to type in code to activate/deactivate system, the alarm will then sound. After 45 seconds the SCADA System/Dialer will activate alarm. Times may be adjusted by operator. At any time security code will deactivate alarm. PART 6- WARRANTY One year warranty for parts and labor shall be supplied after acceptance by Owner SECURITY SYSTEMS Page 2 of2

85 16223 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 -SCOPE OF WORK a. This suggested specification is intended for typical service entrance rated automatic transfer switches consisting of the following main characteristics: 1. Maximum voltage rating of 480 Volt-60Hz 2. Maximum amperage rating for each Generator Set. 3. Programmed transition (break-before-make) transfer logic 4. Service Entrance Rate Automatic Transfer Switches b. Transfer switch shall be supplied by Generator Set Manufacturer. c. Amp rating for each switch shall be adequately sized and as recommended by the Manufacturer. PART 2- AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH This Specification covers the supply of a complete operational service entrance automatic transfer switches shall be rated adequately for the 480 volt, 60 Hz, 3 Phase, 3 Pole System. PART3-CODESANDSTANDARDS The automatic transfer switches and controls shall conform to the requirements of: 1. UL Standard for Transfer Switch for use in Emergency Systems 2. IEC Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear; Multifunction equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment 3. NFP A 70 - National Electrical Code 4. NFPA 99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities 5. NFPA Emergency and Standby Power Systems 6. IEEE Standard IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications 7. NEMA Standard ICS (formerly ICS2-447)- AC Automatic Transfer Switches 8. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment I6223 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Page I of IO

86 PART 4- ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Automatic transfer switches shall be Kohler Service Entrance Rated model KEP-DMTC-1 OOOS-PK, Generac, Caterpillar, or equivalent. Any alternate shall be submitted for approval to the consulting engineer at least 1 0 days prior to bid date. PART 5 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS a. General: 1. The unit shall be manufactured in accordance with this specification and applicable UL, NEMA, and ANSI standards. 2. The unit shall be manufactured in a facility, which is registered to an ISO 9001:2000 quality system. 3. Supplier shall be responsible for ensuring the compatibility of all components of the unit. 4. The unit shall be free of defects in material and workmanship. 5. The unit shall be supplied with a 1 year warranty form the manufacturer at no additional cost. b. Engineering Submittals: The following documentation shall be made available for submission to the project engineer for review/approval purposes on the automatic transfer switch: 1. Physical Layout Drawing-Outline dimensions, cable entry/exit locations, interior/exterior components layouts, connection data. 2. Electrical Schematic Internal wiring, customer connection terminals, optional components, controller settings. 3. Product Data Sheets Equipment Ratings. c. Environmental Conditions: The unit shall be installed with ambient temperature between -l5 C and 50 C and a storage range of -20 C to 70 C at a relative humidity of 0-95% non-condensing. PART 6- RATINGS AND CONSTRUCTION a. Rating of the automatic transfer switch shall be 480 Volt-60Hz, Three phase, 3 Pole. b. The transfer switch shall comprise of 3 switching poles plus a solid neutral. c. The automatic transfer switch shall be rated for Service Entrance applications and shall contain a 1000 Amp standard overcurrent protective device. Molded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall be 80% rated. Molded case switches (MCSW) shall be 100% rated. d. The completed assembly shall be mounted in a NEMA 3R suitable for the intended application. e. All materials and parts used in the unit shall be new, of current manufacturer, of best industrial grade, and free from defects and imperfections AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Page 2 of 10

87 f. The transfer switch mechanism shall provide a simple means of manual operation using only components, which are permanently affixed, in the operating position. g. The unit shall permit manual operation of the transfer switch while the system is energized and carrying rated load. Transfer switches, which require all sources of power to be de-energized prior to manual load transferring, shall not be acceptable. h. Transfer switch control power shall be obtained from the source being transferred to. The controls shall not require any connection to external power source. Transfer switches requiring power from the engine starting (or other) battery are not acceptable. i. A control circuit isolation plug shall be provided to isolate all control circuitry inside the transfer switch to facilitate maintenance procedures. When isolated, there shall be no voltage present on the control circuitry. j. The automatic transfer switch design shall provide front accessible components and wiring for easy serviceability. Power or control connections, which are not readily serviceable while the transfer switch is mounted in its enclosure, are not acceptable. k. All power contacts used shall operate in a quick-make/quick-break manner, the speed of which shall be independent of supply voltage and/or speed of operation by manual means. I. Finish: All steel parts shall be cleaned, sealed and painted with one coat rust resistant primer and two coats of ASA #61 gray enamel or polyester powder coat finish inside and out. m. Ground Lugs/Bus: Adequate size and quantity of ground lugs shall be provided and shall conform to NEC/CEC guidelines. Where a ground bus is provided, it shall be a full length copper ground bus bonded to the frame with adequate size and quantity of ground lugs and shall conform to NEC/CEC guidelines. n. Bus bars: Where load bus bars are utilized, they shall be time plated round-edge high conductivity copper and be sized for 100% continuous load rating of the transfer switch, in accordance with NEMA, CSA, and UL guidelines. The short circuit withstand rating of the completed bus assembly shall be not less than the short circuit fault current of the system. o. Cable Connections: Provision shall be made to terminate all incoming and outgoing power cables and grounding conductors. Connections shall be via screw type cable lugs. p. The Power Switching units shall be fix-mounted, utilize fully enclosed contacts and their withstand/closing rating shall be equal to or exceed the required withstand rating of the complete mechanism. q. The service entrance rated automatic transfer switch shall automatically transfer the load to the generator supply in the event of a utility supply failure and return the load to the utility supply upon restoration. The transfer switch shall incorporate an isolating mechanism and over current protection on the utility supply to allow operation as the main services disconnect in accordance with NEC requirements. The transfer switch power switching devices shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent the utility and generator supplies from being interconnected AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Page 3 of 10

88 PART 7- CONTROLLER DISPLAY AND KEYPAD a. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) as follows: 1. CISPR 11 Radiated Emissions 2. IEC Electrostatic Discharge 3. IEC Radiated Electromagnetic Fields 4. IEC Electrical Fast Transients (Bursts) 5. IEC Surge Voltage 6. IEC Conducted RF Disturbances 7. IEC Magnetic Fields 8. IEC Voltage Dips and Interruptions b. A four-line, 20 character LCD display and dynamic 4 button keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and limited control through the communication interface port. The following parameters shall only be adjustable via a password protected programming on the controller (dip switches shall not be acceptable): 1. Nominal line voltage and frequency 2. Signal or three phase sensing 3. Operating parameter protection 4. Transfer operating mode configuration (Open transition, Closed transition, or delayed transition) All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable and accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals. c. The transfer switch shall be rated for use on multiple system voltages. The transfer switch shall be field configurable to operate on the following nominal system voltages; 208V, 240V, 480V. d. The controller switch shall be rated to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on multi-layer printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial grade, plug-in type. The contrail panel shall be mounted separately from the transfer switch for safety and ease of operation. The protective cover shall include a built-in product for the storage of operation manuals. PART 8- VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY, AND PHASE ROTATION SENSING a. Voltage (all phases) and frequency on both the nmmal and emergency sources shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout, and trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise specified): Parameter Under voltage Over voltage Under frequency Over frequency Voltage unbalance AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Dropout/Trip 75 to 98% 105 to 135% 85 to 99% 105 to 120% 5 to 20% Pickup/Reset 85 to 100% 95 to 100% of trip 95 to 99% 101 to 105% 3 to 18% Page 4 of 10

89 b. Digital metering provided by the transfer switch controller shall have an accuracy of -0.5% for all voltage and frequency readings. Frequency shall be displayed to at least one decimal. Three phase line to line voltages shall be displayed for both generator and utility supplies. c. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within +/-0.5% over an operating temperature range of- 20 C to 70 C. d. And adjustable dropout time for transient voltage and frequency excursions shall be provided. The time delays shall be 0.1 to 9.9 seconds for voltage and.1 to 15 seconds for frequency. e. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the display and keypad or remotely via the communications interface port. f. The controller shall be capable of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or BAC). Unacceptable phase rotation shall be indicated on the LCD; the service required LED and the annunciation through communication protocol and dry contacts. g. The controller shall be capable of detecting a single phasing condition of a source, even though a voltage may be regenerated by the load. This condition shall be considered a failed source. h. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to provide digital readout of voltage on all3 phases (phase to phase and phase to neutral), frequency, and phase rotation. PART 9- TIME DELAYS a. An adjustable time delay of 0 to 10 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to extend this time delay to 60 minutes by providing an externall2 or 24 VDC power supply. b. At time delay shall be provided on transfer to the emergency source, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, for controlled timing oftransfer of loads to emergency. c. A time delay shall be provided on re-transfer to normal. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. d. A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. e. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive external relay(s) for selective load disconnect control. The controller shall be capable of controlling a maximum of 9 individual output time delays to step loads on after a transfer occurs. Each output may be individually programmed for their own time delay of up to 60 minutes. Each sequence shall be independently programmed for transferring from normal to emergency and transferring form emergency to normal. The controller shall also include the following built-in time delays for the following operations: AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Page 5 of 10

90 1. 0 to 60 minute time delay on failure to acquire the acceptable electrical parameters from the emergency source to 60 minute time delay for a failure to synchronize on an in-phase operation minute time delay for the load disconnect position for delayed transition operation. f. All time delays shall be adjustable in I second increments. g. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the display and keypad or with a remote device connected to the communications interface port through a security-password system. h. Each time delay shall be identified and a dynamic countdown shall be shown on the display. PART 10- ADDITIONAL FEATURES a. The controller shall have 3 levels of security. Level 1 shall allow monitoring of settings and parameters only. The level 1 shall be capable of restricted with the use of a lockable cover. Level 2 shall allow test functions to be performed and Level 3 shall allow setting of all parameters. b. Membrane-type switches shall be provided for the test functions and be maintained until the end test function is activated. The test function shall be allowed through password security. It shall be possible to defeat the password requirement by way of a circuit board mounted dip switch setting. The test function shall be load, no load or auto test. The auto test function shall request an elapsed time for test. At the completion of this time delay the test shall be automatically ended and a retransfer sequence shall commence. All loaded tests shall be immediately ended and retransfer shall occur ifthe emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. c. A SPDT contact, rated 5 Amps at 30 VDC shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred. d. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 Amps, 250 V AC shall be provided consisting of two contacts, closed when the A TS is connected to the normal source and two contacts closed, when the A TS is connected to the emergency source. e. LED indicating lights shall be provided; one to indicate when the A TS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source (red). f. LED indicating lights shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights provide true source availability of the normal (green) and emergency sources (red) as determined by the voltage, frequency, and phase rotation sensing trip and reset settings for each source. g. A membrane switch shall be provided on the membrane panel to test all indicating lights and display when pressed. h. Provide the ability to select "commit/no commit to transfer" to determine whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Page 6 of 10

91 i. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which closes to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit signals can be activated through the keypad or the communications interface port. A "not-in-auto" LED shall indicate anytime the controller is inhibiting transfer for occurring. j. A time based load control feature shall be available to allow the prioritized addition and removal of loads based during transfer. This feature may be enabled for either or both sources. The user shall be able to control up to nine loads with independent timing sequences for pre and post transfer delays in either direction of transfer. k. A current based load control feature shall be available to allow the prioritized addition and removal of loads based on the measured current through the transfer switch. This feature may be enabled for either or both sources and shall incorporate high and low set points for both sources. The user shall be able to designate up to nine outputs for current based load control. Adjustable time delays shall be available to prevent changes in outputs for momentary current variations. I. Engine Exerciser - The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to 21 different exercise routines based on a calendar mode. For each routine, the user shall be able to: 1. Enable or disable the routine 2. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine 3. Set the start time a. Time of day b. Day of week c. Week of month (1 5 \ 2nd, 3rd, 4 1 h, alternate or every) 4. Set the duration of the run 5. At the end of the specified loaded exercise duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. All loaded exercises shall be immediately ended and retransfer shall occur if the standby source fails. The next exercise period shall be displayed on the main screen with the type of exercise, time, and date. The type of exercise and the time remaining shall be displayed when the exercise is active. It shall be possible of ending the exercise event with a single button push. m. Date and time - The date shall automatically adjust for leap year and the time shall have the capability of automatically adjusting for daylight saving and standard times. n. System status - The controller shall have a default display the following on: 1. System status 2. Date, time, and type of the next exercise event 3. Average voltage ofthe preferred and standby sources AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Page 7 of 10

92 o. Scrolling through the displays shall indicate the following: 1. Line to line and line to neutral voltages for both sources 2. Frequency of each source 3. Load current for each phase 4. Single or three phase operation 5. Type of transition 6. Preferred source 7. Commit or no commit modes of operation 8. Source/source mode (Utility/Gen; Gen/Gen; Utility/Utility) 9. In phase monitor enable/disable 10. Phase rotation 11. Date and time p. Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display "coded" system status messages, which shall be explained by references in the operator's manual, are not permissible. q. Self Diagnostics -The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which maybe preventing load transfer commands from being completed. r. Communications Interface -The controller shall be capable of interfacing, through a standard communications with a network of transfer switches and generators. It shall be able to be connected via an RS-485 serial communication (up to 4000 ft. direct connect or multi-drop configuration), Ethernet connectivity (over standard 1 ObaseT Ethernet networks utilizing a RJ-45 port or remotely utilizing a dialup modem). This module shall allow for seamless integration of existing or new communication transfer devices and generators. Monitoring software shall allow for the viewing, control and setup of parameters of the genset and transfer switch network through a standard personal computer utilizing current Microsoft operating systems. Separate and specific transfer switch software interfaces shall not be acceptable. s. The transfer switch shall also be able to interface to 3rd party applications using Modbus RTU and Modbus TCPIIP open standard protocols utilizing Modbus register maps. Proprietary protocols shall not be acceptable. t. The controller shall contain a USB port for downloading the controller's parameters and settings; exercise event schedules; maintenance records and event history. The file designator shall be the unique serial number of the transfer switch. u. Data Logging - The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 2000 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory. The controller shall be able to display up to the last 99 events. The remaining events shall be downloadable to be displayed on a computer AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Page 8 of 10

93 1. Event Logging- Data, date, and time indication of any event. 2. Statistical Data: a. Total number of transfers b. Total number of fail to transfer c. Total number of transfer due to preferred source failure d. Total number of minutes to operation e. Total number of minutes in the standby source f. Total number of minutes not in the preferred source g. Normal to emergency transfer time h. Emergency to normal transfer time i. System start date j. Last maintenance date 3. The statistical data shall be held in two registers. One register shall contain data since start up and the second register shall contain data from the last maintenance reset. v. External DC Power Supply - An optional provision shall be available to connect up to two external 12/24 VDC power supply to allow the LCD and the door mounted control indicators to remain functional when both power sources are dead for extended periods of time. This module shall contain reverse battery connection indication and circuit protection. w. Communications Interface - The controller shall be capable of interfacing, through a standard communications with a network of transfer switches and generators. It shall be able to be connected via an RS-485 serial communication (up to 4000 ft. direct connect or multi-drop configuration), Ethernet connectivity (over standard lobaset Ethernet networks utilizing a RJ-45 port or remotely utilizing a dialup modem). This module shall allow for seamless integration of existing or new communication transfer devices and generators. Monitoring software shall allow for the viewing, control and setup of parameters of the genset and transfer switch network through a standard personal computer utilizing current Microsoft operating systems. Separate and specific transfer switch software interfaces shall not be acceptable. PART 11- TESTS AND CERTIFICATION a. Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including compliance with the above codes and standards. The certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at the time of the submittal, shall be included in the certification. b. The A TS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 900 I International Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, and installation and servicing in accordance with ISO 900 I. PART 12- SERVICE REPRESENTATION a. The manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of employing personnel located throughout the contiguous United States. The service center's personnel shall be factory trained and shall be on call24 hours a day, 365 days a year AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Page 9 of 10

94 b. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum of 20 years. PART 13- ACCESSORIES a. Current Sensing: Current sensing shall measure the load bus current on all phases with I% accuracy. Load current shall be viewable on the controller LCD display. b. Heater, Anti-Condensation: An enclosure heater strip shall be supplied inside the transfer switch enclosure and shall be controlled by an adjustable humidistat. The humidistat shall be adjustable from 35% to 95% relative humidity, factory set at 65%. 120VAC power for the strip heater is to be provided by others. A 15A protective circuit breaker is provided. The heater option shall provide 125W or 250W, pending on the configured kit selection AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Page 10 of 10

95 SECTION PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS PART 1- GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the following features: A. Diesel engine. B. Unit-mounted cooling system. C. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. D. Outdoor enclosure. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator and accessory indicated. 2. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that engine-generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: A. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." B. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. C. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 2. Source quality-control test reports. 3. Field quality-control test reports. 4. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Pagel of12

96 d. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and maintenance data. e. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 2. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 4. Comply with ASME B Comply with NFPA Comply with NFPA Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Levell emergency power supply system. 8. Comply with UL Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements. f. PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: A. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C. B. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet. g. WARRANTY 1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. A. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Page2 of12

97 PART 2- PRODUCTS a. MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Caterpillar; Engine Div. B. Generac Power Systems, Inc. C. Kohler Co.; Generator Division. D. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. E. MTU Onsite Energy b. ENGINE-GENERATOR SET 1. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set. 2. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments. 3. Capacities and Characteristics: A. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing. B. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. C. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component. 4. Generator-Set Performance: A. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. B. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent stepload increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds. C. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. D. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. E. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds. F. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent. G. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Page3 of12

98 less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components. c. ENGINE 1. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm. 3. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm. 4. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: A. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow. B. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe. C. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances. 5. Engine Fuel System: A. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. B. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source. 6. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFP A 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity. 7. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. 8. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on enginegenerator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump. A. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. B. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. 9. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine back:pressure requirements. A. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 db at 500 Hz. B. Sound level measured at a distance of 23.0 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is complete shall be 83.6 dba or less PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Page4 of12

99 10. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator. 11. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground. A. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. B. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding. C. Cranking Cycle: Three cycles of 45 seconds crank and 15 seconds rest each cycle. D. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging. E. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating. a. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL d. FUEL OIL STORAGE 1. Comply with NFPA Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank. Features include the following: A. Tank design provides capacity for thermal expansion of fuel. B. Direct reading fuel level gauge. C. Fuel supply dip tube is positioned so as not to pick up fuel sediment. D. Fuel return and supply dip tubes are separated by an internal baffle to prevent recirculation of heated return fuel. E. Fuel Fill, 4", lockable flip top cap F. Primary tank level detection switch in containment basin. G. Primary and secondary tanks are leak tested at 3psi minimum. H. Welded steel containment basin (minimum of 110% of primary tank capacity). I. Interior tank surfaces coated with a solvent-based thin-film rust preventative. J. Heavy gauge steel gussets suitable for lifting package. K. Gloss black polyester alkyd acrylic enamel exterior paint over epoxy based primer. L. Primary tanks are equipped with customer com1ections for remote fuel transfer, return, and vent. M. Rear and right side stub-up access. N. Emergency vents on primary and secondary tanks sized in accordance with NFPA Tank shall be compatible with generator set weatherproof enclosure. P. Tank shall mount below the generator set wide base. Q. Tank shall be provided with low fuel level switch (alarm and shutdown). R. Capacity: 600 Gallons or amount of fuel required for 24 hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output, whichever is greater PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Page 5 o 12

100 e. CONTROL AND MONITORING 1. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When modeselector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. 2. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. 3. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, and the following: A. AC voltmeter. B. AC ammeter. C. AC frequency meter. D. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). E. Engine-coolant temperature gage. F. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. G. Running-time meter. H. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). I. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. J. Generator overload. 4. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Levell systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel. A. Emergency stop shutdown. B. Overcrank shutdown. C. Low coolant temperature warning. D. High coolant temperature warning I shutdown. E. Low oil pressure wanring I shutdown. F. Overspeed warning I shutdown. G. Low coolant level warning I shutdown. H. Low fuel level warning I shutdown. I. BPS supplying load status. J. Control switch not in auto warning. K. High battery voltage warning I shutdown. L. Low battery voltage warning I shutdown. M. Battery charger AC failure warning I shutdown. N. Low cranking voltage 0. Engine running PACKAGED ENGINE GENERA TORS Page 6 of12

101 6. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flushmounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated. 7. Provide control panel with Modbus RS485 Serial compatibility for communication to the SCADA system. Coordinate exact requirements with System Integrator. f. GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION 1. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying withnemaab 1 and UL489. A. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. B. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. C. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. D. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. g. GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1. Comply with NEMA MG Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor. Provide with permanent magnet excitation. 3. Electrical Insulation: Class H (105deg C temperature rise at full load and 40 deg C ambient). 4. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. 5. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. 6. Enclosure: Dripproof. 7. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. 8. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. A. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band. 9. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point. 10. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding PACKAGED ENGINE GENERA TORS Page 7 o 12

102 11. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum. h. OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE 1. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 90 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure. A. Enclosure shall be approved for use with UL 2200 listed generator set packages. B. Enclosure shall be provided with environmentally friendly, polyester powder baked paint. C. Enclosure shall be provided with stainless steel fasteners D. Enclosure shall be provided with radiator site window. E. Enclosure shall be provided with top mounted critical exhaust silencing system. (Shipped loose for installation at site). F. Enclosure shall be 14 gauge steel. G. Enclosure shall be provided with cable entry area for installation. H. Enclosure shall accommodate output circuit breaker installation. I. Enclosure shall be provided with double doors on both sides. Doors shall be vertically hinged doors allowing 180 degree opening rotation. J. Lube oil and coolant drain pipes shall be routed to exterior of enclosure and shall be terminated with drain valves. K. Provide with radiator fill cover. L. Enclosure shall be provided with lockable access doors with standard key utilization. M. Cooling fan and battery charging alternator shall be fully guarded. N. Fuel fill, oil fill, coolant, and battery can only be reached via lockable access. 0. Provide with stub-up cover sheets for "rodent proofmg". P. Provide with externally mounted emergency stop button. Q. Enclosure shall be designed for spreader bar lifting to ensure safety. R. Enclosure shall be provided with control panel viewing window. 2. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external electrical connection. A. 24VDC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both unavailable. Lighting shall be on timed switch to automatically shut off lights after a set time adjustable from 0-60 minutes. i. VIDRATION ISOLATION DEVICES 1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint. A. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. B. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Page 8 o 12

103 C. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. D. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. E. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. j. FINISHES 1. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. k. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. A. Tests: Comply with NFP A 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115. B. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test. C. To ensure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliability and quality standards, the manufacturer and/or local representative shall be responsible for three separate tests: design prototype tests, final production tests, and site tests. 2. Design Prototype Tests: Components of the emergency system, such as the engine/generator set, transfer switch, and accessories, shall not be subjected to prototype tests because the tests are potentially damaging. Rather, similar design prototypes and preproduction models shall be subject to the following tests. A. Maximum power (kw). B. Maximum motor starting (kv A) at 35% instantaneous voltage dip. C. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and/or by resistance method per NEMA MG D. Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient conditions. E. Voltage regulation and generator transient response. F. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor. G. Three-phase short circuit tests. H. Alternator cooling air flow. I. Torsional analysis to verify that the generator set is free of harmful torsional stresses. J. Endurance testing. 3. Final Production Tests: Each generator set shall be tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include: A. Single-step load pickup B. Safety shutdown device testing C. Rated Power@ 0.8 PF D. Maximum power E. Upon request, a witness test, or a certified test record sent prior to shipment PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Page 9 o 12

104 4. Site Tests: The manufacturer's distribution representative shall perform an installation check, startup, 4 hour load bank test and building load test. The engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and date of the site test. The tests shall include: A. Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze shall be checked for conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations, under the environmental conditions present and expected. B. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. These shall include: block heaters, battery chargers, alternator strip heaters, remote annunciators, etc. C. Generator set startup under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during operation, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage and frequency, and phase rotation. D. Automatic start by means of a simulated power outage to test remote-automatic starting, transfer of the load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted for proper system coordination. Engine coolant temperature, oil pressure, and battery charge level along with generator set voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the test. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA fustall packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance. 3. fustall packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch on 4-inch- high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 4. Electrical Wiring: fustall electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted. 5. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance. 6. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector. 7. Connect fuel piping to engines with a isolation valve and union and flexible connector. 8. Ground equipment according to Section "Grounding and Bonding." 9. Connect wiring according to Section "Conductors and Cables." PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Page 10 o 12

105 10. Identify system components according to Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Section "Electrical Identification." b. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 2. Tests and Inspections: A. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test. C. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages. a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. D. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and floatcharging conditions. E. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. F. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. G. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified. H. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits. 3. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. 4. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 5. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation PACKAGED ENGINE GENERA TORS Page 11 o 12

106 6. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 7. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 8. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. 9. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. c. DEMONSTRATION 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS Page12of12

107 16243 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSDUCERS PART 1 -GENERAL a. Scope: 1. This specification describes the submersible level transducer for the contract drawings. 2. Transducers shall be supplied as part of the controls and monitoring system. 3. Transducers, cables, fittings, and appurtenances shall be supplied and installed as necessary. 4. Inside wetwells or tanks, Contractor shall install 4-inch Sch 40 PVC stilling well with l-inch holes on 6-inch centers, opposite sides of pipe, with stainless steel stop pin at bottom and cap with hole for coax cable per manufacturers recommendations. b. Manufacturer: Transducers shall be as manufactured by Ametek or equivalent. PART 2- CONSTRUCTION a. Depth of Operation: 1. Transducers for discharge side of pumps shall be designed for depth ranges of 0 to 460 feet water head. 2. Transducers on suction side of pumps shall be designed for depth ranges ofo to 230 feet water head. 3. Transducers at elevated water storage tanks shall be designed for depth ranges of 0 to 230 feet water head. 4. Transducers for wetwells shall be designed for depth ranges of feet. 5. Other standard depth ranges are acceptable with Engineer review and approval. b. Output: Output signal shall be 4-20 rna current. c. Power: Power supply shall be volts DC with reverse polarity surge protection or limited to 28 volts DC as necessary. Loop resistance shall be 1400 ohms maximum at 40 volts. d. Operating Range: Operating range shall be at least from 32 F to 104 F (0 to 40 C). overrange effect shall be± 15% full scale at 300% of maximum range. Accuracy shall be 0.25% full scale. Zero off set shall be 0.25% full scale set at 25 F. span shall be 0.5% full scale at 25 C temperature effects shall be maximum ± I% URL output change for ± 25 C temperature change within compensated range when calibrated at 25 C. Power supply effect shall be± 0.005% full scale per volt. e. Hardware Construction: Housing, nuts, washers, and diaphragm shall be type 316 L stainless steel. Cable grommet and housing o'ring shall be viton. Cable jacket shall be polyurethane. Snub nose shall be nylon 616 and removable with Yz-inch NPT. The unit shall contain media capable construction. Electrical construction shall contain attached 20 gauge polyurethane shielded cable. Cables shall be onspliced and long enough for each transducer as necessary with all fittings. Transducer shall meet hazardous locations requirements. Transducer shall be approximately 7-inches long and l-inch diameter SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSDUCERS Page I of2

108 PART 3- SPARE PARTS At least one spare transducer for each required temperature range shall be supplied to Owner. PART 4- START UP The manufacturer shall supply at least one trip for eight hours for start up services at no additional cost to the Owner SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSDUCERS Page 2 of 2

109 SECTION VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART I-GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors. b. DEFINITIONS 1. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance). 2. CPT: Control power transformer. 3. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. 4. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor. 5. LAN: Local area network. 6. LED: Light-emitting diode. 7. MCP: Motor-circuit protector. 8. NC: Normally closed. 9. NO: Normally open. 10. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. 11. PCC: Point of common coupling. 12. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. 13. PWM: Pulse-width modulated. 14. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 15. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion. 16. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand. 17. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 1 of13

110 c. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. All units to be Clean Power minimum 18-pulse rectifier type with integral phase-shifting autotransformers, guaranteed to meet IEEE levels for harmonic distortion of both current and voltage. Provide multiple cooling fans in transformer section for system redundancy, as well as transformer winding temperature switches. 2. ACTION SUBMITTALS 3. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, and furnished specialties and accessories. 4. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. A. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each VFC and installed devices. g. Specified modifications. B. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. d. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around VFCs. Show VFC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. 2. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. 3. Product Certificates: For each VFC, from manufacturer. 4. Harmonic Distortion Levels. Provide 18-pulse rectifier guaranteed to meet IEEE Source quality-control reports. 6. Field quality-control reports. 7. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full-load currents VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 2 o 13

111 8. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. e. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. A. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and MCP trip settings. B. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. C. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. D. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. f. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 1. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. A. Power Fuses: Provide a minimum of three fuses for every size and type used. B. Control Power Fuses: Provide a minimum of two fuses for every size and type used. C. Indicating Lights: Provide 22mm multi-cluster super-bright pilot LEDs only (100,000 hour life minimum). D. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare for each size and type of magnetic controller installed. g. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NET A or an NRTL. A. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 2. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Comply with NFPA IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test VFC according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 3 o 13

112 h. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers and install temporary electric heating as required PROJECT CONDITIONS 2. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: A. Ambient Temperature: Units shall be rated for a minimum of service factor amps of motor being served at continuous output at 122 deg F. Size/derate equipment as necessary. B. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F C. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). D. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet. 3. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. i. COORDINATION 1. Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: A. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. B. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. C. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. 2. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. 3. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. j. WARRANTY 1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. A. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty shall cover all parts, labor, meals, travel, and any other expenses. B. Reference project alternate for alternate warranty pricing VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page4 of13

113 PART 2- PRODUCTS a. MANUFACTURED UNITS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. B. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand. C. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Drives Div. D. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. E. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. General Requirements for VFCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 7 and NEMA ICS All units must be UL 508C certified including phase-shifting autotransformer as a package. 3. Application: Variable torque. 4. VFC Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, de bus, and IGBT, PWM inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one three-phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. A. Units suitable for operation of NEMA M G 1, Design A and Design B motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both." B. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors." C. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection. 6. Output Rating: Three-phase; 10 to 66 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage. 7. Unit Operating Requirements: A. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent ofvfc input voltage rating. B. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent. C. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent ofvfc frequency rating. D. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60Hz, full load. E. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 99 percent under any load or speed condition. F. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 100 ka. G. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 122 deg F VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 5 o 13

114 H. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F I. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). J. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet. K. Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC L. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds. M. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60Hz. N. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. 0. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 1.0 to 10.0 khz. P. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and de injection braking. 8. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, isolated from all power circuits. 9. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range. A. Signal: Electrical, 4-20 madc, with provisions for scaling in VFC. 10. Internal Adjustability Capabilities: A. Minimum Speed: 0 to maximum speed. B. Maximum Speed: minimum speed to 320Hz. C. Acceleration: 0.1 to seconds. D. Deceleration: 0.1 to seconds. E. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating. 11. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: A. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage. Provide 100 ka Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) unit with LED indication of protection status on each phase. B. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm. C. Under- and overvoltage trips. D. Inverter overcurrent trips. E. VFC and Motor Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFC overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad; NR TL approved. F. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. G. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. H. Loss-of-phase protection. I. Reverse-phase protection. J. Short-circuit protection. K. Motor overtemperature fault VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 6 of13

115 12. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts. 13. Power-futerruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged. 14. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load. 15. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds. 16. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds. 17. futegral fuput Disconnecting Means and OCPD: Provide integral100 kaic rated molded-case circuit breaker with flange-mounted door-interlocked operating mechanism and provisions for lock-out/tag-out with up to three padlocks. b. CONTROLS AND INDICATION 1. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED pilot light indication displaying the following conditions: A. Motor Running. B. Motor Stopped. C. Fault. 2. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-english language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. A. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes. B. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service. a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote source. 3. Historical Logging fuformation and Displays: A. Provide separate door-mounted electro-mechanical time clock to accumulate run hours. VFC keypad will not suffice for this requirement. B. Fault log, maintaining last thirty faults in order VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 7 o 13

116 C. Provide display of motor overtemperature shutdown via external temperature switches. 4. Indicating Devices: Digital displayand additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to: A. Output frequency (Hz). B. Motor speed (rpm). C. Motor status (running, stop, fault). D. Motor current (amperes). E. Motor torque (percent). F. Fault or alarming status (code). G. DC-link voltage (V de). H. Set point frequency (Hz). I. Motor output voltage (V ac). J. Motor Temperature Shutdown 5. Control Signal Interfaces: A. Electric Input Signal Interface: a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs. A 4-20 madc signal shall be used to control VFC speed in Auto, and a door-mounted one-tum potentiometer shall be used to modulate a 0-10 VDC speed setpoint in Hand. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs. B. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems: a. 0- to 10-V de. b. 4- to 20-mA de. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. C. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of two programmable analog output signal4- to 20- ma de, which can be configured for any of the following: a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). c. DC-link voltage (V de). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz). D. Remote Indication Interface: Dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following: a. Motor running. b. VFD Fault VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 8 o 13

117 c. Motor Overtemp. c. LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING 1. All input power to VFC shall first pass through 100 kaic rated molded-case circuit breaker, followed by 200 kalc rated Class T semiconductor fuses, as well as phase-shifting autotransformer, and input line reactors. A TVSS unit shall provide further protection against input transient voltages. A. Control Circuits: 120V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate all integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA. d. ENCLOSURES 1. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location with dual doors and keylock entry protection unless noted otherwise on construction drawings. A. Indoor Enclosures to be dust-tight NEMA 12 rated with dual doors and keylock entry protection. B. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. C. Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel. D. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. e. ACCESSORIES 1. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. A. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: a. Push Buttons: Valve Reset. b. Pilot Lights: LED only (incandescent not acceptable). c. Selector Switches: Rotary type, Hand/Off! Auto. d. Speed Potentiometer: 5k ohm 1-tum, 1 watt. 2. Control Relays: All ice-cube relays to include indicating LEDs to show coil voltage present, as well as test pushbuttons and lever operated test-and-hold feature to simplify trouble-shooting. All relay sockets to be finger-safe with captive screws. A. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C Supplemental Digital Meters: VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 9 of13

118 A. Elapsed-time meter. Provide non-resettable electro-mechanical type on door. 4. Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: Provide thermostatically-controlled VFC cooling fans which shut down when motor is idle. f. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS A. Test each VFC with phase-shifting transformer as an assembly while fully loaded. B. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features specified. 2. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3- EXECUTION a. EXAMINATION 1. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. 2. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 3. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. b. INSTALLATION 1. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. 2. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in related sections of specifications. A. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. B. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. C. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 10 of13

119 D. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. c. IDENTIFICATION 1. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. B. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate. C. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. 2. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front ofvfc units. d. CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION 1. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. 2. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. 3. Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable. A. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position. B. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. e. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 2. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. 3. Perform tests and inspections. A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 4. Acceptance Testing Preparation: VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 11 of13

120 A. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. B. Test continuity of each circuit. 5. Tests and Inspections: A. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. B. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. C. Test continuity of each circuit. D. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). E. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. F. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. G. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. H. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFC. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. I. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 6. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 7. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action. f. STARTUP SERVICE 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. Manufacturer shall be responsible for as much time and as many visits as necessary to properly commission the system. A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide a minimum 4 hours training for owner's personnel 011 operation, mainte11ance, and trouble-shooting of the system VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 12 of13

121 g. ADmSTING 1. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. 3. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. fuitially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings. 4. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers. 5. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges 6. Set field-adjustable valve limit switches. h. PROTECTION 1. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. 2. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. i. DEMONSTRATION 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs. END OF SECTION VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS Page 13 o 13

122

123 SECTION TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION PART 1- GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section includes field-mounted TVSS for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and control equipment. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights, electrical characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Field quality-control reports. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. d. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and maintenance data. e. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with IEEE C and test devices according to IEEE C Comply with NEMA LS 1. Comply with UL 1283 and UL Comply with NFPA 70. f. WARRANTY 1. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. A. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION Page 1 of5

124 PART 2- PRODUCTS a. SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. ABBUSA. B. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. C. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. D. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power. E. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. F. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Surge Protection Devices: A. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. B. Comply with UL C. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. D. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. E. Redundant suppression circuits. F. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 3. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 240 ka per mode/480 ka per phase. 4. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described in IEEE C A. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A. B. Line to Ground: 70,000 A. C. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A. 5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4- wire circuits shall be as follows: A. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V. B. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V. C. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V. b. P ANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. ABB USA. B. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. C. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. D. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson Network Power TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION Page 2 o 5

125 E. Siemens Energy & Automation, fuc. F. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Surge Protection Devices: A. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. B. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. C. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. D. Redundant suppression circuits. E. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. F. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 3. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 ka per mode/240 ka per phase. 4. Minimum single impulse current ratings, using 8-by-20-mic.sec waveform described in IEEE C : A. Line to Neutral: 70,000 A. B. Line to Ground: 70,000 A. C. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A. 5. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, 3-phase, 4- wire circuits shall be as follows: A. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277 V. B. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y /277 V. C. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277 V. 6. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, 3-phase, 4- wire circuits shall be as follows: A. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120 V. B. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120 V. C. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120 V. 7. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shall be as follows: A. Line to Neutral: 400 V. B. Line to Ground: 400 V. C. Neutral to Ground: 400 V. 8. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240 V, 480 V, or 600 V, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows: A. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V, 1000 V for 240 V. B. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V, 800 V for 240 V TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION Page 3 of 5

126 c. ENCLOSURES 1. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1 in finished space, Type 4X in areas subject to corrosion. 2. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 4X. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Install TVSS devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance ground. 2. Install TVSS devices for panelboards and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground. A. Provide multiple circuit breakers sized per manufacturer's recommendations as a dedicated disconnecting means for TVSS unless otherwise indicated. b. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform tests and inspections. A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 2. Tests and Inspections: A. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, "Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. After installing TVSS devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. C. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. TVSS device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports. c. STARTUP SERVICE 1. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment and panelboards to their sources until TVSS devices are installed and connected TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION Page4 ofs

127 2. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the TVSS installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect immediately after the testing is over. d. DEMONSTRATION 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to maintain TVSS devices. END OF SECTION TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION Page 5 ofs

128

129 16341 OVER CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL The extent of overcurrent protective device work is indicated by plan drawings and schedules. Types of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following: Circuit Breakers: Molded-case. Solid-state trip. Fuses: Class L time-delay. Class L fast -acting. Class RKI time-delay. Class RKI and Class J current-limiting. Class EKS time-delay. Class KS one-time. PART 2- QUALITY CONTROL a. National Electric Code: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent protective devices. b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc: Comply with applicable requirements oful 489, "Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures", and UL 198D, "High-Interrupting-Capacity Class K Fuses". Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL-listed and labeled. c. National Electrical Manufacturing Association: Comply with applicable requirements ofnema Std Pub Nos. ABl, AB2, and SG3 pertaining to molded-case and low-voltage power type circuit breakers. d. American National Standards Institute: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1 pertaining to low-voltage cartridge fuses. PART 3- REQUIRED SUBMITTALS a. General: Submit manufacturer's data on overcurrent protective devices, including: amperes, voltages and current ratings, interrupting ratings, current limitations, internal characteristic curves, and mounting requirements. b. Maintenance Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than one unit of each OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Page 1 of 3

130 PART 4- MATERIALS a. Manufacturers of circuit breakers shall be as follows: (or approved equivalent) Cutler-Hammer, Inc. SquareD Co. b. Manufacturers of fuses shall be as follows: (or approved equivalent) Bussmann Div; McGraw-Edison Co. General Electric Co. Gould, Shawmalt, Inc. 1. CIRCUIT BREAKERS a. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation. b. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, molded-case circuit breakers offrame size indicated; rated amperes as indicated, 600-volts, 60 Hz, 3-poles with 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting ratings. Provide breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trips in each pole, and with fault-current limiting protection, amperes ratings as indicated. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle trip indication. Provide push-to-trip button on cover for mechanical tripping circuit breakers. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connectors lugs AL!CU rated. 2. FUSES a. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time/current and peak let-through current characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and construction in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations. b. Class L Time-Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class L time-delay fuses rated 600 V, 60Hz, 800 amperes, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting service entrances and main feeder circuit breakers. c. Class L Fast-Acting Fuses: Provide UL Class L fast-acting fuses rated 600 V, 60Hz, 400 amperes, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting service entrances and main feeder circuit breakers. d. Class RKI Time-Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RKl time-delay fuses rated 600 V, 60Hz, 400 amperes, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting motors and circuit breakers OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Page 2 of 3

131 e. Class RKl and Class J Current-Limiting Fuses: Provide UL Class RI and Class I current-limiting fuses rated 250 V, 60Hz, 200 amperes. with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting circuit breakers. f. Class RKS Time-Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RK5 time-delay fuses rated 600- V, 60 Hz, 300 amperes, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting motors. g. Class KS One-Time Fuses: Provide UL Class K5 one-time fuses rated 250V, 60 Hz, 200 amperes; with 100,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting non-inductive loads. PART 5- CONSTRUCTION a. Installation of Overcurrent Protective Devices b. Install overcurrent protective devices as required, in accordance with manufactures's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. c. Fasten circuit breakers without causing mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cabling. d. Set field-adjustable circuit breakers for trip settings as required, subsequent to installation of units. e. Install fuses, if any, in fused circuit breakers OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Page 3 of3

132

133 SECTION LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES PART 1- GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section includes lightning protection for structures, structure elements, and building site components. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories. A. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation. B. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFP A 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Field quality-control reports. d. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Installer Qualifications: Certified by UL, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 2. System Certificate: A. UL Master Label. 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article. PART 2 -PRODUCTS a. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 1. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES Page 1 of3

134 2. Roof-Mounted Air Tenninals: NFPA 780, Class I, copper unless otherwise indicated. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ERICO International Corporation. b. Preferred Lightning Protection. c. Robbins Lightning, Inc. B. Air Tenninals More than 24 Inches Long: With brace attached to the tenninal at not less than half the height ofthe tenninal. C. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Tenninals: Designed specifically for singlemembrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in roofing Sections. 3. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper. 4. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned. 5. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet long. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA Conceal the following conductors: A. System conductors. B. Down conductors. C. Interior conductors. D. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of building. 3. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothennic-welded connections in underground portions of the system. 4. Cable Connections: Use exothennic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. A. Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothennic-welded connections may be used only below the roof level. 5. Air Tenninals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet in length to lightning protection components LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES Page 2 o 3

135 7. Ground Loop: fustall ground-level, potential equalization conductor and extend around the perimeter of structure. A. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building foundation. B. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop. C. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet of grade level. 8. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 50-foot intervals. b. SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS 1. fustall sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." c. CORROSION PROTECTION 1. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials. 2. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors. d. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components. 2. UL fuspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system. END OF SECTION LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES Page 3 of3

136

137 SECTION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less: A. Full-voltage magnetic. b. DEFINITIONS 1. CPT: Control power transformer. 2. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. 3. MCP: Motor circuit protector. 4. N.C.: Normally closed. 5. N.O.: Normallyopen. 6. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. c. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS d. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. 2. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures. A. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. e. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Field quality-control reports. f. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and maintenance data ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Page 1 o 5

138 g. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NFP A 70. PART 2- PRODUCTS a. FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS 1. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A. 2. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Configuration: Nonreversing. C. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type. a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. D. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. E. Control Circuits: 24-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. F. Bimetallic Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 10 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. G. External overload reset push button. 3. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Page2 ofs

139 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Fusible Disconnecting Means: a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class R fuses unless otherwise indicated. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. C. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open. D. Non-fusible Disconnecting Means: a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, non-fusible switch. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open. b. ENCLOSURES 1. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA res 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location unless otherwise noted on drawings. A. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. B. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. C. Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel. D. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. E. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12. c. ACCESSORIES 1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA res 5; heavy-duty type; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 2. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 3. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Page3 ofs

140 PART 3 -EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height, and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 2. Floor-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete base. A. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. B. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. C. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. D. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller. 4. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. 5. Comply with NECA 1. b. IDENTIFICATION 1. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification." A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. B. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. C. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. c. CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION 1. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Comply with requirements in Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." 2. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. 3. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Page 4 of5

141 A. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. B. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, hightemperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. d. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform tests and inspections. 2. Acceptance Testing Preparation: A. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. B. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Tests and Inspections: A. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. B. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. C. Test continuity of each circuit. D. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Engineer before starting the motor(s). E. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. F. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. G. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. H. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 4. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 5. Prepare test and inspection reports. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. e. DEMONSTRATION 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS Page 5 o 5

142

143 16440 INSTRUMENTATION AND ELECTRICAL SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SYSTEM PART 1-SCOPE OF WORK a. This section includes the following major components to be furnished by the Systems Integrator: la. If Aeromod Sequox Option is purchased: 1. Main Breaker Panel 2. Operations/Monitoring Panel 3. Main Lug Panels 1 and 2 4. Service Panels 2, 3, 4 and 5 5. Single Phase Transformer 6. 3 Phase Transformers 7. Belt Filter Press/UV equipment building shall communicate with the MCP. 8. Tie into Aeromod System lb. If Oxidation Ditch Option is purchased: 1. Motor Control Center 2. Main Control Panel 3. Distribution Panels 1 and 2 4. Service Panels 2, 3, 4, and 5 5. Single Phase Transformers 6. 3 Phase Transformers 7. Belt Filter Press/UV equipment building shall communicate with the MCP. 8. Tie into RAS/W AS Pumps, Rotors, and Clarifier System. 9. Dissolved Oxygen and Sludge Control Logic a. Dissolved Oxygen and Rotor Speed Logic b. RAS/W AS/Digester Automation Logic INSTRUMENTATION AND SCAD A SYSTEM Page 1 o 9

144 2. Radio Telemetry System (RTS) 3. Remote Telemetry Units (RTU) a. North East Pump Station b. Southwest/Highway 36 Pump Station 4. Coaxial Cables with connectors installed 5. Antennas, Antenna Towers and/or Masts 6. Operator Interface Computer 7. Fiber Optic Cables, Patch Panels, and Appurtenances as necessary. 8. System must be complete and operational. b. The Systems Integrator shall furnish all of the above items for field installation by the Contractor. The Systems Integrator shall furnish all necessary hardware and configured software with composite wiring diagrams and dimensional drawings, in order to insure a complete and operable system. c. The System Integrator shall be responsible for coordinating equipment wiring and logic with the Contractor in order to make the components function as one system. d. The new plant controls, telemetry, and interface must be seamlessly compatible with the existing SCADA and Telemetry system located at the water treatment facility. PART 2- SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR QUALIFICATIONS a. The work to be accomplished under this section shall be the product of a single Systems Integrator who has at least ten years experience furnishing similar SCADA systems. At least one full-time employee of the Systems Integrator shall have completed a factory training program conducted by the radio manufacturer. b. Systems Integrators must have service personnel, who are full-time employees, residing within 200 miles of the job site. The Systems Integrator must have a panel shop that is UL 508 certified. c. Systems Integrators will not be considered unless they have performed a radio site survey, and the results of this survey have been received by the Engineer no later than ten days prior to the bid date. Latitudinal and longitudinal coordinates for each site shall be included in the survey report. The results of this survey will determine whether any Intermediate Remote Terminal Units (repeaters) are required. If required, the survey report shall indicate the coordinates for the location of any repeaters. If required, repeaters shall meet all of the specification requirements applicable under Part 5 - Radio Telemetry System. The radio system shall be fully compatible with the city's existing radio system, as provided by Systems Manufacturing, Inc., Lenexa, KS. d. The Systems Integrator shall coordinate closely with the process equipment suppliers to ensure equipment compatibility. e. Whether a Systems Integrator is qualified will ultimately be the determination of the Engineer INSTRUMENTATION AND SCAD A SYSTEM Page2of9

145 PART 3-MOTOR CONTROL CENTER a. Motor Control Centers shall be NEMA Class II, Type B. The enclosure shall be Type 1A. with gasketed doors. All wireway and unit doors shall be gasketed. The motor control center shall be U.L. listed per UL 845, and meet the applicable NEMA and ANSI standards. The service entrance motor control center shall have a SUSE label. b. Structures shall be totally enclosed, free standing assemblies. They shall be approximately 90-inches high and 16-inches deep with front mounted units. Structures shall contain a horizontal wireway at the top and bottom, isolated from the horizontal bus, and shall be readily accessible through a hinged cover. The horizontal wireway shall be free to obstruction from structure. Adequate space for conduit and wiring to enter the top or bottom shall be provided without structural interferences. c. Each structure shall contain a main horizontal tin plated copper bus with minimum ampacity as shown on the drawings. Vertical bus shall be tin plated copper securely bolted to the main horizontal bus. The vertical bus shall be completely isolated and insulated. The bus system shall be braced for 65,000 AIC. d. Motor starters shall be of the NEMA rated circuit breaker combination type with motor circuit protectors rated 65,000 AIC symmetrical at 480V. Starter overload shall be electronic, ambient compensated. Each starter shall be equipped with a control power transformer. Each starter shall have one spare N.O. and one spare N.C. auxiliary interlock in addition to those required to perform the functions of this project. e. Starters for motors rated 20HP or greater shall be solid state reduced voltage type. Pump starters shall have ramp up/down control. f. The motor control center shall be given a phosphatizing pre-treatment and anionic, thermoset acrylic finish of the manufacturer's standard color. g. Motor control center shall include a dry type transformer to provide 120/240V AC, single phase. The transformer shall have a maximum temperature rise of 150C, and maximum sound level of 45dB. Taps shall be provided for voltage adjustment. Transformer shall conform to NEMA TP-1. h. Motor control center shall include a 120/240V AC single phase circuit breaker panelboard, fed from the dry type transformer. The panelboard shall have 225A main breaker and 42 branch circuits, and meet UL 67 standards. i. Motor control center shall be as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, Square D, General Electric or approved equivalent. PART 4- MAIN CONTROL PANEL (OPERATIONS/MONITORING PANEL) a. The Main Control Panel shall be constructed using a blank motor control center section, or a NEMA 12 rated free-standing enclosure, as manufactured by Hoffman or equivalent. If a NEMA 12 freestanding enclosure is used, the height and depth shall approximate the motor control center dimensions. b. The panel shall be constructed in accordance with the relevant Specification Sections c. The Main Control Panel shall contain the telemetry transmitter, lightning arrestor, modem, master programmable logic controller, uninterruptible power supply, and any other items necessary for a complete SCADA system INSTRUMENTATION AND SCADA SYSTEM Page 3 of9

146 PART 5- RADIO TELEMETRY SYSTEM 1. GENERAL a. The radio telemetry system shall be an unlicensed spread spectrum radio telemetry system. The radio telemetry system shall be fully compatible with the city's existing radio telemetry system. b. The System Integrator shall be responsible for providing all necessary hardware and software required for a reliably operable telemetry system. This shall include, but not be limited to, programmable logic controllers, power supplies, radios, lightning arrestors, antennas, antenna towers, and/or masts and coaxial cable. The radio telemetry system shall use off-the-shelf hardware and software, and be programmable logic controller based. Radio telemetry systems using proprietary hardware and/or software shall not be permitted. c. The Systems Integrator shall determine how and where to mount antennas, subject to approval of the Engineer. It shall be the responsibility of the Systems Integrator to furnish such masts or towers as have been determined necessary, and to install the coax, coax connectors and antennas. The telemetry system shall have no paths with a signal strength of less than -90dB RSSI. After installation, the telemetry system shall be tested for actual path signal strengths under full foliage conditions. The results of this test shall be submitted to the Engineer. 2. MASTER STATION RADIO a. The radio system within the Main Control Panel shall be compatible with the city's existing radio system. Addressing shall be consistent with the existing system and radio traffic shall be configured to avoid traffic issues with the existing system. 3. MASTER STATION ANTENNA a. The master station antenna shall be omnidirectional with a minimum 3.OdB gain. It shall be capable of 400 watts with a VSWR of less than 1.5. Direct ground lightning protection shall be provided. Antenna shall be Decibel, Scala, Antennex or approved equivalent. b. The antenna shall be connected to the radio with low-loss foam-dielectric type, 0.5 inch diameter transmission cable. Provide standard Type N connectors with "0" ring seals. Provide weatherproof transmission cable suitable for duct environmental exposure. Cable shall be Andrew Corporation LDF4-50A, Belden, Alpha or approved equivalent. 4. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER a. The PLC shall be capable of DIN rail or panel mounting. The PLC processor shall have at least one 10/100 Mbps Ethernet communication port, and one RS-232 communication port. The PLC processor shall have a minimum of 1.5 Mb of available user memory. The PLC processor shall have non-volatile battery backed RAM for both logic program and data storage. PLC processor shall be capable of using a nonvolatile compact flash memory card. The PLC processor shall be rated for operating temperatures of -20 to 60 degrees Celsius, and storage temperature of -40 to 85 degrees Celsius. The PLC shall be rated for 0 to 95% relative humidity, noncondensing. The PLC shall be, Allen-Bradley CompactLogix, Allen Bradley ControlLogix, or approved equivalent INSTRUMENTATION AND SCADA SYSTEM Page 4 of9

147 b. All analog inputs and outputs shall be of an optical and magnetic isolated design. All inputs and outputs shall be wired to terminal blocks, and all discrete outputs must use interposing relays located with the Main Control Panel. Interposing relays shall include Push-To-Test/Manual Override function and Pilot Light. The Systems Integrator shall provide 25% spare I/0 of each type pre-wired to terminal blocks. c. The PLC shall be programed utilizing standard ladder logic programming language, and shall be performed with personal computer based programming software, capable of on-line/off-line programming and documentation. 5. REMOTE STATION RADIOS Remote Station Radios shall be identical to Master Station Radios, except for being programmed as remotes or repeaters, as required. 6. REMOTE STATION ANTENNAS a. Antennas shall be directional with a minimum lodb gain. They shall be capable of 150 watts with a minimum 20dB front-to-hack ratio. Direct ground lightning protection shall be provided. Antennas shall be Decibel, Scala, Antennex or approved equivalent. b. Antennas shall be connected to radios with low-loss foam-dielectric type, 0.5 inch diameter transmission cable. Provide standard Type N connectors with "0" ring seals. Provide weatherproof transmission cable suitable for direct environmental exposure. Cable shall be Andrew Corp. LDF4-50A, Belden, Alpha or approved equivalent. 7. REMOTE STATION PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS a. The PLC shall be a self contained control system with power supply, central processing unit, memory, inputs/outputs, and communication contained in a single housing. The PLC shall be capable of DIN rail or panel mounting. b. The PLC shall have a minimum of 4K words of user logic memory. The PLC shall have built-in nonvolatile memory storage. The PLC shall have a minimum VO count of 10 discrete inputs and 6 discrete outputs with VO expansion capability. The PLC family shall include a model with capability for analog VO. The PLC shall contain an RS-232 port, Ethernet/IP port, and a time-of-day clock. c. The PLC shall program utilizing standard ladder logic programming language. The programming shall be performed with personal computer based programming software, capable of on-line/off-line programming and documentation. d. The PLC shall be rated for operating temperatures of -20 to 65 degrees Celsius, and storage temperature of -40 to 85 degrees Celsius. The PLC shall be AB MicroLogix 1100, 1400, CompactLogix, or approved equivalent. 8. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) shall be provided at the Main Control Panel. UPS shall be rated 1500V A with "overload" and "low battery runtime" warnings. EMVRFI noise filtering shall be an inherent feature, such that no additional filtering shall be required. RTUs shall integrate an uniterruptible power supply or shall have a battery backed 24VDC power system INSTRUMENTATION AND SCADA SYSTEM PageS of9

148 9. REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS Each remote terminal unit (RTU) shall contain the remote station radio, battery backed up power supply, programmable logic controller and other required miscellaneous items. The enclosure shall be NEMA 4 with drip shield if location is outside, white interior and manufacturer's standard exterior finish. VO shall be provided to accommodate the signals required, plus 20% spare. 10. LIGHTNING ARRESTORS Each radio shall be protected by a bulkhead mounting lightning arrestor that has a frequency range of l25mhz to 1000MHz. VSWR shall be no greater than 1.1 to 1 over the frequency range, and insertion loss shall not be greater than 0.1dB over the frequency range. The arrestor shall be capable of 800mJ for 8/20ms waveform. Operating temperature range shall be -55C to +SOC, with 90% relative humidity. Arrestor shall be Tessco, PolyPhaser IS-B50HN-C2 or approved equivalent. 11. DISSOLVED OXYGEN AND SLUDGE CONTROL LOGIC a. Biological Dissolved Oxygen: 1. Logic shall be built into the PLC that will allow the Operator to control Dissolved Oxygen (DO) (mg/l) in either or both oxidation ditch channel by automatically ramping up and slowing down the rotors. DO probe signals shall be monitored and used by PLC Logic. The Operator will be able to adjust rotor speed manually or automatically. The Operator will also be able to manually adjust water depth in the basins and change the rate of return activated sludge into each channel to help control D.O. 2. Operator will have ability to automatically control rotor speed. Some examples below: a. Outer channel DO probe will be the basis for rotor 1 speed to maintain DO between mg/l DO. If DO drops below 0.5 mg/l then rotor speed will increase. If DO exceeds 0.7 mg/l then rotor 2 speed will decrease. b. Inner channel DO probe will be basis for rotor 2 speed to maintain DO between mg/l DO. If DO drops below 1.4 then rotor 2 speed will increase. If DO exceeds 1.6 mg/l DO then rotor 2 speed will decrease. c. Operator will be able to set either channel DO to drive speed of either rotor. d. Operator will be able to set and adjust DO limit parameters. e. The logic would be expandable for future improvements. b. RAS/W AS/Disgester Automation Logic: 1. Logic shall be built into the PLC that will allow the operator to adjust RAS/W AS pump speeds, run times, off times, RAS/W AS retum sludge times, waste sludge times, WAS valve open/close, RAS valve open/close, decant valve open/close, digester blower, run time, digester blower off time, sludge settlement, sludge decant, and sludge pumping INSTRUMENTATION AND SCADA SYSTEM Page 6 o 9

149 2. RAW pump shall run at operator selected pump speed and RAS valve shall open. To waste sludge, RAS valve shall close and WAS valve shall open for a predetermined time period set by the operator. Operator shall be able to select either one or both RAS/W AS pumps to operate with either or both clarifiers operating. The RAS/W AS meter shall record instantaneous and totalize the amount of RAS and WAS liquid pumped separately based upon run times and flow. 3. Operator shall be able to set times and sequence to waste sludge to the decant, then aerate with blower for a predetermined time period, then settle for a predetermined time period without wasting sludge or blowers operation prior to decant valve opening for a predetermined time period. Logic shall then continue with sequence of returning sludge, wasting sludge and decanting. 4. Operator shall be able to automatically set a time to stop wasting sludge and aerating to allow settlement for pumping settled sludge from digester. Sludge pumps shall be turned on manually and an automatic timer may be set by operator to shut off pumps when filling a tank as a backup to the operator manually shutting off pumps. c. Digester Control Logic Example: Final layout and programming will be evaluated and determined with submittal review process. 1. W AS/RAS Pumps No. 1 and 2: Either pump in automatic shall run anytime either the WAS valve of the RAS valve reports an open limit switch. The pump(s) shall continue to run until both valves report a closed limit switch. These pumps will not alternate automatically. 2. RAS Valve Operation: d. WAS Valve Operation: a. Cycle valve per the RAS valve cycle timer. The cycle timer will operate continuously in background with operator set times through the pic display panel. Set limits as follows: 1. Maximum on time 0-6 hours 2. Maximum off time 0-2 hours b. The WAS valve operation shall override the RAS valve and cause it to close when the WAS valve is called to open. The WAS valve and the RAS valve shall not be open at the same time except during transitions. The RAS valve cycle timer will continue to operate even when the RAS valve is overridden by the WAS valve. The RAS valve will simply re-join the cycle timer when released by the WAS valve. c. The RAS valve cycle timer shall start in the open mode on power up. 1. The WAS valve cycle shall be initiated by "time of day" and the duration shall be 0-30 minutes. Up to four cycle times per day shall be provided. 2. The WAS valve open state shall override the RAS valve per 2.b above. 3. Close valve on high transducer level or high float level. 4. Decant operation shall override WAS valve. See decant valve operation INSTRUMENTATION AND SCADA SYSTEM Page 7 of9

150 e. Decant Valve Operation: 1. The decant valve operation for either digester shall be initiated by transducer level. 2. hnmediately stop blower and start delay time (set by operator 0-30 minutes) before opening decant valve 3. Open decant valve and close at stop level. 4. Restart blower 5. Re-enable WAS valve operation 6. Override WAS valve iflevel gets to transducer low level alarm or low level float. f. Digester Blower Operation: 1. Cycle timer set by operator. Blower on at plc power up. a. On time range 0-6 hours b. Off time range 0-1 hour 2. Decant valve overrides per 4.b above g. High Level and Low Level Transducer (PD6060 relay 3 and 4 respectively): 1. High Level: 2. Low Level: a. Close WAS valve b. Energize alarm relay to SCADA a. Close decant valve b. Energize alarm relay to SCADA h. High Level and Low Level Float: a. High level: a. Close WAS valve b. Energize alarm relay to SCADA b. Low level: a. Close decant valve b. Energize alarm relay to SCADA INSTRUMENTATION AND SCAD A SYSTEM Page 8 of9

151 PART 6- OPERATOR INTERFACE COMPUTER a. An operator interface computer with graphical software shall be located in the office/lab area. It shall meet the following minimum specifications: 1. Windows 7 Operating System 2. Dual Core Intel 2.40 GHz processor 3. 22" 1 080P Widescreen monitor 4. 4GB, 1333 MHz, DDR3 SDRAM 5. Dual 500GB hard drives 6. 16X DVD+/-RW drive 7. Mini Tower Configuration 8. Intouch Runtime 3Ktag with I/0 9. Microsoft Office Basic b. Graphical Interface Software shall be configured with graphical screens, trend screens, alarm screens, setpoint screens and utility screens. The screens shall be developed to 80% completion at least two months prior to scheduled startup. A review meeting shall be held at the owner's facility two months prior to startup to review the screens with the engineer and/or owner. The engineer/owner comments will be incorporated into the final screen configuration. PART 7- TELEPHONE DIALER a. A telephone dialer shall be provided as a part of the Main Control Panel, connected to a dial-up telephone line furnished by the Owner. The phone dialer shall be supplied with 16 inputs, and shall be expandable to a total of 40 inputs. The phone dialer shall incorporate user recorded messages for the individual alarms. The phone dialer shall allow for programming of up to 48 phone numbers with 32 digits each. It shall have built in power fail and sound level monitoring. PART 8- REMOTE ACCESS a. The systems integrator shall provide remote access to the SCADA computer. The remote access shall be used by the systems integrator to maintain the SCADA system remotely. The remote access shall also be available to the owner to allow the operator to remotely monitor the SCAD A system from their internet computer or smartphone. The systems integrator shall demonstrate operation of the remote access to the owner and shall train the owner on how to use the remote access. The owner will be responsible for providing a high speed internet connection at the WWTP. Password protection shall be provided for security. PART 9- START-UP SERVICES a. The Systems Integrator shall provide a minimum of two (4) days of initial startup services and onehalf (0.5) day of operator training after acceptance. The Systems Integrator shall make one-day call backs on the Owner at three (3) months and six ( 6) months after acceptance. The call backs will be intended for the System Integrator to insure that everything is operating properly. b. Complete operation and maintenance manuals (with as-built drawings) shall be supplied. PART 10- SUBMITTALS Submittals required for components, wiring, logic, and installation INSTRUMENTATION AND SCADA SYSTEM Page 9 o 9

152

153 SECTION SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section Includes: A. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. B. Transient voltage suppression devices. C. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. D. Instrumentation. E. Control power. F. Accessory components and features. G. Identification. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. A. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. B. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. C. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Field quality-control reports. d. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and maintenance data. e. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA PB Comply with NFP A 70. l~ls~tchboards Page 1 of6

154 4. Comply with UL 891. f. WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS a. MANUFACTURED UNITS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. B. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial- Electrical Distribution C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. D. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards: A. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. B. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. C. Sections front and rear aligned. 3. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V. 4. Main-Bus Continuous: 1200 A. 5. Enclosure: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1. A. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface. B. Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt-on rear covers for each section, with provisions for padlocking. 6. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard. 7. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments. 8. Phase and Neutral Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated. Tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy with tin-plated aluminum circuitbreaker line connections. A. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- nummum size, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. B. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends SWITCHBOARDS Page2 o 6

155 C. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. 9. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment. b. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES 1. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state, parallel-connected, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: A. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. B. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. C. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. D. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. E. Transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. 2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 ka per mode/240 ka per phase. 3. Withstand Capabilities: 5000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 ka), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. 4. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows: A. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. B. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. C. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. c. DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTNE DEVICES 1. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. A. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. B. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting. C. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments SWITCHBOARDS Page 3 of 6

156 d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I 2 t response. D. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMAFU 1, RK-5. E. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. g. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. d. INSTRUMENTATION 1. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following: A. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices. B. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kv A. 2. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or fourwire systems and with the following features: A. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated: a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from five to 60 minutes SWITCHBOARDS Page 4 of 6

157 B. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door. e. CONTROLPOWER 1. Control Circuits: 24-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from controlpower transformer. 2. Electrically Interlocked Main Circuit Breakers: Two control-power transformers in separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each control-power transformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 24-V secondaries connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme. 3. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits. 4. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 A WG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. f. IDENTIFICATION 1. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install switchboards and accessories according to NECA Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness. A. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. B. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. C. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. D. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards. 3. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components. 4. Install filler plates in unused spaces ofpanel-mounted sections SWITCHBOARDS PageS of6

158 5. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation. A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. 6. Comply with NECA 1. b. IDENTIFICATION Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification." Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification" and construction drawings. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification" and construction drawings. c. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Acceptance Testing Preparation: A. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. B. Test continuity of each circuit. 2. Tests and Inspections: A. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NET A Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. C. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION SWITCHBOARDS Page 6 o 6

159 SECTION PANELBOARDS PART 1- GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. A Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. B. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. C. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. D. Short-circuit current rating ofpanelboards and overcurrent protective devices. E. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. F. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. G. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panel boards. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Field quality-control reports. 2. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards. d. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and maintenance data. e. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with NEMA PB Comply with NFPA P ANELBOARDS Page 1 o 5

160 f. WARRANTY 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. Reference TVSS specification for special warranty on TVSS units. PART 2- PRODUCTS a. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR P ANELBOARDS 1. Enclosures: Flush or recess mounted as shown on construction drawings. A. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location unless noted otherwise on construction drawings. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. B. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. C. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder. 2. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom as indicated on construction drawings. 3. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 4. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. A. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. B. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. C. Lug Sizing: Size lugs to allow for termination of number of sets and conductors sizes as listed on the construction drawings. D. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. E. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. F. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 5. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. 6. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. b. DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: P ANELBOARDS Page 2 o 5

161 A. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. B. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. D. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Panel boards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. 3. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. A. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as indicated on construction drawings. 5. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers. 6. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. c. LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. B. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. D. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. 3. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only as indicated on construction drawings. 4. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. 5. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. d. DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. B. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial- Electrical Distribution. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. D. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric P ANELBOARDS Page3 o 5

162 2. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. A. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. B. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting. C. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and J1t response. D. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. E. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). F. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). G. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240- V, single-pole configuration. H. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Remote-mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Shunt Trip as indicated on drawings: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in off position. PART 3 - EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panel boards and accessories according to NECA Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 3. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box P ANELBOARDS Page4 of5

163 4. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. A. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. 5. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 6. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. 7. Comply with NECA 1. b. IDENTIFICATION 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section "Electrical Identification." 2. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. 3. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification." 4. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section "Electrical Identification." c. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Acceptance Testing Preparation: A. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. B. Test continuity of each circuit. 2. Tests and Inspections: A. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION P ANELBOARDS PageS o 5

164

165 SECTION MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. Section includes MCCs for use with ac circuits rated 600 V and less and having the following factory-installed components: A. Incoming main lugs and OCPDs. B. Full-voltage magnetic controllers. C. Reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers. D. Multispeed controllers. E. Feeder-tap units. F. Instrumentation. G. Auxiliary devices. b. DEFINITIONS 1. BAS: Building automation system. 2. CPT: Control power transformer. 3. LED: Light-emitting diode. 4. MCC: Motor-control center. 5. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker. 6. MCP: Motor-circuit protector. 7. NC: Normally closed. 8. NO: Normally open. 9. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. 10. PT: Potential transformer. 11. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier. c. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each type of controller and each type ofmcc. 2. Shop Drawings: For each MCC, manufacturer's approval drawings as defined in UL 845. In addition to requirements specified in UL 845, include dimensioned plans, elevations, and MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 1 of12

166 sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. A Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. B. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for each installed controller. C. Nameplate legends. D. Vertical and horizontal bus capacities. E. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each installed unit. d. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around MCCs where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show MCC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements. Product certificates. Source quality-control reports. Field quality-control reports. e. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and maintenance data. f. QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company ofneta or an NRTL. Source Limitations: Obtain MCCs and controllers of a single type from single source from single manufacturer. 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 4. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 -PRODUCTS a. MANUFACTURED UNITS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page2 o 12

167 A. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. B. General Electric Company; GE Industrial Systems. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.; Power Distribution. D. SquareD; a brand of Schneider Electric. 2. General Requirements for MCCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 18 and UL 845. b. FUNCTIONAL FEATURES 1. Description: Modular arrangement of main units, controller units, control devices, feeder-tap units, instruments, metering, auxiliary devices, and other items mounted in vertical sections of MCC. 2. Controller Units: Combination controller units. A. Install units up to and including Size 3 on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions. B. Equip units in Type B with pull-apart terminal strips for external control connections. 3. Future Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units. 4. Spare Units: Installed in compartments indicated "spare." c. INCOMING MAINS 1. Incoming Mains Location: Bottom. 2. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. A. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. B. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and Ft response. C. MCCB Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 3 of12

168 c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. f. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 3. Electrically Interlocked Main Circuit Breakers: Two control-power transformers in separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each control-power transformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 24-V secondaries connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail-safe automatic transfer scheme. d. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES 1. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, solid-state, parallel-connected, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: A. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. B. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. C. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. D. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. E. Transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. 2. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 ka per mode/240 ka per phase. 3. Withstand Capabilities: 5000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 ka), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage. 4. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows: A. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. B. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. C. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. e. COMBINATION CONTROLLERS 1. Full-Voltage Controllers: A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Enclosed Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 4 of12

169 B. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. a. Configuration: Nonreversing. 2. Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers: A. General Requirements for Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers: Comply with UL508. B. Reduced-Voltage, Solid-State Controllers: An integrated unit with power SCRs, heat sink, microprocessor logic board, door-mounted digital display and keypad, bypass contactor, and overload relay; suitable for use with NEMA MG 1, Design B, polyphase, medium-induction motors. a. Configuration: Severe duty; nonreversible. b. Starting Mode: Voltage ramping, Current limit, Torque control ; field selectable. c. Stopping Mode: Coast to stop, Adjustable torque deceleration, Adjustable braking; field selectable. d. Shorting (Bypass) Contactor: Operates automatically when full voltage is applied to motor, and bypasses the SCRs. Solid-state controller protective features shall remain active when the shorting contactor is in the bypass mode. e. Shorting and Input Isolation Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type; manufacturer's standard operating voltage, matching control power or line voltage, depending on contactor size and line-voltage rating. Provide coil transient suppressors. f. Logic Board: Identical for all ampere ratings and voltage classes, with environmental protective coating. g. Adjustable acceleration-rate control using voltage or current ramp, and adjustable starting torque control with up to 400 percent current limitation for 20 seconds. h. SCR bridge shall consist of at least two SCRs per phase, providing stable and smooth acceleration without external feedback from the motor or driven equipment. i. Keypad, front accessible; for programming the controller parameters, functions, and features; shall be manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following functions: 1) Adjusting motor full-load amperes, as a percentage of the controller's rating. 2) Adjusting current limitation on starting, as a percentage of the motor fullload current rating. 3) Adjusting linear acceleration and deceleration ramps, in seconds. 4) Initial torque, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque. 5) Adjusting torque limit, as a percentage of the nominal motor torque. 6) Adjusting maximum start time, in seconds. 7) Adjusting voltage boost, as a percentage of the nominal supply voltage. 8) Selecting stopping mode, and adjusting parameters. 9) Selecting motor thermal-overload protection class between 5 and ) Activating and de-activating protection modes. 11) Selecting or activating communications modes. j. Digital display, front accessible; for showing motor, controller, and fault status; shall be manufacturer's standard and include not less than the following: MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 5 o 12

170 1) Controller Condition: Ready, starting, running, stopping. 2) Motor Condition: Amperes, voltage, power factor, power, and thermal state. 3) Fault Conditions: Controller thermal fault, motor overload alarm and trip, motor underload, overcurrent, shorted SCRs, line or phase loss, phase reversal, and line frequency over or under normal. k. Controller Diagnostics and Protection: 1) Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring SCR and motor thermal characteristics, and providing controller overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad. 2) Protection from line-side reverse phasing; line-side and motor-side phase loss; motor jam, stall, and underload conditions; and line frequency over or under normal. 3) Input isolation contactor that opens when the controller diagnostics detect a faulted solid-state component, or when the motor is stopped. 1. Remote Output Features: 1) All outputs prewired to terminal blocks. 2) Form C status contacts that change state when controller is running. 3) Form C alarm contacts that change state when a fault condition occurs. m. Optional Features: 1) Analog output for field-selectable assignment of motor operating characteristics; 0 to 10-V de or 4 to 20-mA de; field adjustable. 2) Additional field-assignable Form C contacts for alarm outputs. 3) Surge suppressors in solid-state power circuits providing three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage. 4) Full-voltage bypass contactor operating manually, with NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch. Power contacts shall be totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide; and assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. 3. Disconnecting Means and OCPDs: A. MCP Disconnecting Means: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with frontmounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. d. (1) NC & (1) NO alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped. B. MCCB Disconnecting Means: MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 6 of12

171 4. Control Power: a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with intenupting capacity to comply with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle. e. (1) NC & (1) NO alarm contact that operates only when MCCB has tripped. A. Control Circuits: 24-VAC or 12-VAC; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 200 VA. f. INSTRUMENTATION 1. fustrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMAEI 21.1, and the following: A. PTs: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, single secondary; disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices. B. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; wound type; single secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices. C. CPTs: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kv A. 2. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or fourwire systems and with the following features: A. Listed or recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. B. fuputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated to 600 V. C. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with the indicated maximum accuracy tolerances: a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Three-Phase Real Power (Megawatts): Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Three-Phase Reactive Power (Megavars): Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 7 o 12

172 D. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door. g. ENCLOSURES 1. Enclosures: Freestanding steel cabinets unless otherwise indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 2. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray fmish over a rustinhibiting primer on treated metal surface. 3. Compartments: Modular; individual lift-off doors with concealed hinges and quick-captive screw fasteners. Interlocks on units requiring disconnecting means in off position before door can be opened or closed, except by operating a permissive release device. 4. Interchangeability: Compartments constructed to allow for removal of units without opening adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other units in MCC; same size compartments to permit interchangeability and ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing three single units with a unit requiring three spaces, without cutting or welding. 5. Wiring Spaces: A. Vertical wireways in each vertical section for vertical wiring to each unit compartment; supports to hold wiring in place. B. Horizontal wireways in bottom and top of each vertical section for horizontal wiring between vertical sections; supports to hold wiring in place. h. AUXILIARY DEVICES 1. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. A. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty type. a. Push Buttons: Shrouded types; maintained contact unless otherwise indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types;; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type. B. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours ; resettable. C. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or minus 2 percent accuracy with selector switches having an off position. 2. (1) NC, (1) NO contactor auxiliary contact(s). 3. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays. 4. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 8 of12

173 i. CHARACTERISTICS AND RATINGS 1. Wiring: NEMA ICS 18, Class I, Type B-D, for starter Size 3 and below. 2. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V, three phase, four wire. 3. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Unit: Fully rated; 65 lea. 4. Short-Circuit Current Rating ofmcc: Fully rated with its main overcurrent device; 65 lea. 5. Environmental Ratings: A. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 0 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F, with an average value not exceeding 95 deg F over a 24-hour period. B. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F C. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). D. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 6600 feet, or 3300 feet if MCC includes solid-state devices. 6. Main-Bus Continuous Rating: 1200 A. 7. Horizontal and Vertical Bus Bracing (Short-Circuit Current Rating): Match MCC short-circuit current rating. 8. Main Horizontal and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of MCC's main and vertical sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder bus. 9. Vertical Phase and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire usable height of vertical sections, except for sections incorporating single units. 10. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of98 percent conductivity, tin plated. 11. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. 12. Ground Bus: Minimum size required by UL 845, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors. 13. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible MCCs: A. Main Devices: Fixed mounted. B. Controller Units: fixed mounted. C. Feeder-Tap Units: fixed mounted. D. Sections front and rear aligned. 14. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of unit MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 9 of12

174 j. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1. MCC Testing: fuspect and test MCCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS MCCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 3. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 -EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Floor-Mounting Controllers: fustall MCCs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base. A. fustall dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. B. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. C. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. D. fustall anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 2. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 3. fustall fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section "Fuses." 4. fustall heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed. 5. fustall, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. 6. Comply with NECA 1. b. IDENTIFICATION 1. Comply with requirements in Section "Electrical Identification" for identification of MCC, MCC components, and control wiring. A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. B. Label MCC and each cubicle with engraved nameplate. C. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page10of12

175 c. CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION 1. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's SCAD A System. 2. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. 3. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. A. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. B. Connect selector switches within enclosed controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. d. CONNECTIONS 1. Comply with requirements for installation of conduit in Section "Raceways and Boxes." Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties. 2. Comply with requirements in Section "Grounding and Bonding." e. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform tests and inspections. 2. Acceptance Testing Preparation: A. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. B. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Tests and Inspections: A. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. B. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. C. Test continuity of each circuit. D. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager before starting the motor(s). E. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. F. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. G. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. H. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 4. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 11 o 12

176 5. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. f. ADJUSTING 1. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. 2. Adjust overload relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays. 3. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Construction Manager before increasing settings. 4. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage, solid-state controllers. 5. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. g. DEMONSTRATION 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers. END OF SECTION MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS Page 12 o 12

177 16445 LOGIC BASIC SUMMARY PART I-GENERAL a. This section outlines the basic SCADA Programming Requirements to be used as a guideline. The plans and specifications outline more detailed requirements for each local panel and each piece of equipment. After bidding and contract award, the Contractor shall plan on at least two meetings with the Engineer and manufacturer to discuss detailed SCADA system, MCC, and MCP layout and programming. This would also include local panel details and layouts. b. The complete system must function effectively as one treatment unit. PART 2- OUTLINE a. MCC/MCP and Controls: 1. Gen Set. 2. Phase Monitor. 3. Local Panels. 4. Biological process (Option I or Option 2). Biological- Alarms to SCAD A: 1. Option 1 - Aeromod 2. Option 2 - Oxidation Ditch 5. MCC/MCP shall have switches and lights. a. SCADA System shall be active. b. CPU shall be active. 6. Security Alarms sent to MCP/SCADA 7. Transducers 8. PLC's 9. Gen Sets 10. Transfer Switches 11. Transformers 12. All Wires, Conduit, Fiber, and Junction Boxes LOGIC BASIC SUMMARY Page 1 of6

178 b. Sludge System: This may be modified and detailed with Contractor following bid award. 1. To produce dewatered sludge: a. System shall stop wasting sludge and aerating the sludge storage basin prior to operating the belt filter press for a predetermined time period set by the operator. 1. WAS Valve closed for 0-Ditch. 2. Digester Blowers stop for 0-Ditch 3. Air Valve for Aeromod. b. All waste sludge systems stop for an operator set point predetermined time period prior to making sludge. 2. Belt Press starts manually and the below will start automatically: a. Sludge Pump Starts - HOA. b. Polymer System Starts- HOA. c. Conveyor/Cake Pump Starts - HOA. d. Wash/Process Water Pump Starts- HOA. e. Filtrate/Process Water Starts - HOA. This pump station will also operate in automatically if liquid level rises in the sump in a lead/lag mode. f. All Speed Controls will be Operator Set Points. g. Belt press control panel setup may vary depending upon Manufacturer. 3. In case of Alarm for BFP: Any alarm for sludge processing goes to BFP-PLC. Which will be sent to the MCP. 1. System will shutdown except for filtrate waste duplex pump station as this operates from water level in the Sump. 2. Any alarm to BFP PLC will be sent to MCP at lab/operations building. 3. Operator must acknowledge alarm. a. AtBFP PLC b. At Local Control Panel c. Correct Problem d. Reset System 4. Restart Sludge Process System LOGIC BASIC SUMMARY Page 2 of6

179 c. Headworks: d. UV System: 4. Alarms for BFP Sludge System shall include but not be limited to: a. BFP: 1. Bar Screen: 1. Low Water Pressure 2. Others per BFP Specifications as recommended by BFP Manufacturer. b. Polymer System: Common Alarm/Fail c. Conveyor/Cake Pump: Common Alarm/Fail d. Filtrate/Wastewater Pump: Pump Control Panel 1. Pump 1 - Fail 2. Pump 2- Fail 3. HWLAlarm e. Wash/Process Water: Pump Control Panel. 1. Pump No. 1 - Fail 2. Pump No. 2- Fail 3. Low Water Pressure f. Digester Blower: Pneumatic valve that serves the aeromad digester air inlet pipe. a. Local Panel- Common Alarm to MCP b. Alarm: 1. High Water Level 2. Torque Overload 3. Washer Compactor: Alarm 2. Grit Collection: Common Alarm to MCP a. Blower: Alann b. Grit Auger: Torque Overload Alarm 3. Sampler: Do not need to monitor at MCP 1. Common Alarm 2. Start and Stop Banks and Modules based upon Effluent Meter Flow LOGIC BASIC SUMMARY Page 3 of6

180 a. Modules are on Sequence Alternator. Three Banks per Module each Bank started by Operator Set Point based upon Flow. 1. Module No. 1: On/Off Activate at 0-2 MGD 2. Second Module Activate at 2 MGD- 4 MGD. (Operator Set Point- activates at 1.9 MDG). 3. Third Module: Backup for redundancy 4. Operator shall be able to: b. Module No. 2: On/Off c. Module No.3: On/Off e. Sewage Grinder Pump: Operations Building Common Alarm f. Security Alarm System: Common Alarm to MCP. 1. Fire 2. Smoke 3. Unauthorized Entry 4. Air Gas g. Air Gas Alarm System: 1. Headworks (Future by Owner) 2. Sludge/UV Building h. Effluent Flow Meter: 1. GPM 2. Totalize i. Effluent Sampler: Do not monitor at MCP j. Generator Set: 1. On/Off 2. Common Alarm to MCP 1. Set Start/Stop Points based upon flow 2. Set Lead/Lag/Lag-Lag redundant to any Module LOGIC BASIC SUMMARY Page 4 of6

181 k. Sewer Pump Stations: 1. Northeast Pump Station- Common Alarm to MCP a. Pump No.1- On/Off /Alarm b. Pump No.2- On/Off /Alarm c. Pump No. 3 -Future 2. Southwest Pump Station- Common Alarm to MCP a. Pump No. 1 -On/Off Alarm b. Pump No. 2 -On/Off Alarm c. Pump No. 3 -Future d. Security e. High Water Level Alarm f. Gen Set g. Wet Well Levels- Operator Set Points 1. Lead 2. Lag 3. HWL I. Option No. 1 - Aeromod: 1. PLC shall operate the system. a. Shall be Programmed by Manufacturer. b. Failure ofplc shall activate Mechanical Timers. 2. Compressor shall have Low Pressure Alarm. 3. PLC shall direct Air Flow to Diffusers in the Basins by Pneumatic Solenoid Valves. 4. Blowers shall be VFD Controlled. 5. Each Blower shall be Monitored by SCADA. a. On b. Off c. Speed d. Fail 6. Mixer local panels shall be monitored a. Mixer No. 1- On/Off/Alarm b. Mixer No.2- On/Off/Alarm 7. D.O. shall be monitored which shall control Basin Aeration LOGIC BASIC SUMMARY Page 5 of6

182 m. Option No. 2- Oxidation Ditch: 1. Mixers Monitored: a. Mixer No. 1-On/Off /Alarm b. Mixer No. 2- On/Off/ Alarm 2. Rotor No.1: a. On/Off I Alarm b. VFD 3. Rotor No.2: 4. RASNo.l: a. On/Off I Alarm b. VFD a. On/Off/ Alarm b. VFD 5. RASNo.2: a. On/Off/ Alarm b. VFD 6. Clarifier No.1: On/Off/Alarm 7. Clarifier No.2: On/Off/Alarm 8. SCUM/Pump: 1. Local Panel 2. On/Off/ Alarm 9. Digester Blower: 1. Local Panel 2. Blower No.1- On/Off/Alarm 3. Blower No.2- On/Off/Alarm 10. DO Monitor: Reading from each D.O. probe sent to MCP/SCADA for processing. 11. RAS/W AS Pump Station: Security. PART 3- SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be prepared by system integrator to be submitted by the Contractor that describes operating descriptions and provides one-line diagram for the complete facility LOGIC BASIC SUMMARY Page 6 of6

183 16446 DUPLEX "Q" CONTROL PANEL PART 1- GENERAL a. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide duplex motor control panel as specified herein for: 1. Northeast Pump Station 2. Southeast Pump Station b. The motor control panel shall be assembled and tested by a shop meeting U.L. Standard 508 for industrial controls. The motor control panel shall be assembled and tested by the same manufacturer supplying the pump so as to insure suitability and assurance of experience in matching controls to motors and to insure single source responsibility for the equipment. PART 2 - CONSTRUCTION a. The controls for the pump shall be contained in a steel enclosure meeting NEMA 3R requirements with hinged door and neoprene gasket. b. The enclosure shall have provisions for padlocking. A nameplate shall be permanently affixed to the panel and include the model number, voltage, phase, hertz, ampere rating and horsepower rating. A warning label against electric shock shall be permanently affixed to the outer door. All fasteners shall be 300 series stainless steel or type aluminum, or thermoplastic. The outer door shall be attached to the enclosure using captured, quarter turn thermoplastic screws and a non-corrosive lift off hinge. The hinge shall permit the outer door to be separated from the main enclosure, when opened, by a simple upward motion. A hinge arrangement which requires unbolting for removal of the outer door is not acceptable. c. A steel back panel with electroplated bright zinc and clear chromate finish shall be provided. A painted steel back panel shall not be acceptable. The back panel shall be mounted on stainless steel bolts using stainless steel nuts and lock washers to maintain enclosure integrity and shall be used as the means for mounting the components in the enclosure. d. For each pump a run light and a hand-off-auto switch shall be provided. Run lights and hand-off auto switches shall be mounted on an electroplated bright zinc with clear chromate finish steel bracket. The run lights and hand-off-auto switches and all other controls shall be properly labeled as to function. The hand-offauto switches shall be rocker type with an electrical life of 50,000 operations. The run lights shall match the hand-off-auto switches in appearance and have an electrical life of 50,000 hours. Run lights shall be red. e. The incoming power shall be as required to operate the pump station. Thermal blocks with box type lugs shall be supplied to terminate all wiring for floats and heat and seal sensors for the pump, if required. The pump leads shall be terminated at the overload relay or at box type terminal blocks. The terminal blocks for the float connections shall be on the pump controller, as described herein. f. A circuit breaker shall be used to protect from line faults and to disconnect the pump from the incoming power. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic and sized to meet NEC requirements for motor controls DUPLEX "Q" CONTROL PANEL Page I of3

184 g. The magnetic starter shall include a contactor with a minimum mechanical life of3,000,000 operations and a minimum contact life of 1,000,000 operations. Definite purpose contactors shall not be acceptable. The magnetic starter shall include an overload relay which is ambient temperature compensated and bimetallic. The overload relay shall be capable of being set in either a manual or automatic reset mode. In the manual mode, reset shall be accomplished only by the operator. At 6 times full load amps the overload relay shall trip within 10 seconds or Class 1 0 rated overload relays shall be required. h. Control voltage shall be 120 V AC and may be accomplished by the means of a transformer or available line voltage. A control fuse and on/off switch shall protect and isolate the control voltage from the line. i. Wire ties shall be used to maintain panel wiring in neat bundles for maintenance and to prevent interference with operating devices. All wiring shall be color coded to facilitate maintenance and repair of the control panel. Where a color is repeated, number coding shall be added. A schematic shall be petmanently attached to the inside surface of the front door. j. All ground connections shall be made with ring tongue terminals and star washers to assure proper ground. k. A duplex pump controller shall be provided for control logic. Pump controller shall be solid state utilizing a printed circuit board to avoid conventional wiring. The printed circuit board of the pump controller shall be made ofu.l. listed materials. I. The pump controller shall indicate float circuit operations utilizing red amber LED indicator lights. LED indicator lights shall provide adequate information so that they can be used for diagnosis in troubleshooting problems located in the float circuits. Each LED shall be permanently labeled on the pump controller as to function. m. Pump controller shall have provisions for connecting float level controls and heat sensor monitors, where applicable, to box type lug connectors. n. Box type lug connectors shall be made of polyamide thermoplastic to exclude aging due to heat influences. Phenolic type terminal blocks on the pump controller shall not be acceptable. Each terminal block shall be properly and permanently labeled on the pump controller as to its purpose. o. Pump controller shall include alternating circuit of the low voltage type and be operational from a transformer mounted on the pump controller board. The alternator shall consist of an alternating relay which alternately switches when voltage is removed from its circuit. Alternating circuit shall have a totally isolated ground. p. Wiring of hand-off-auto switches, run lights, contactors, and overloads to the pump controller shall be accomplished by means of plug connectors. The pump controller shall have male header assemblies from the corresponding devices on the pump controller for that male header assembly. Header assemblies shall be constructed of a corrosion-resistant thermoplastic material having a temperature range of -55 C to 105 C and copper alloy, bright acid tin over nickel plating contacts. There shall be no external lights on the pump control panel. All must be NEMA 4X rated and on a hinged dead front door on the panel interior DUPLEX "Q" CONTROL PANEL Page 2 of3

185 PART 3 - OPTIONS Panel shall be equipped with the following additional features: 1. U.L. 508, intrinsically safe circuit extensions for floats. (Standard construction only) 2. U.L. 913 labeled with intrinsically safe circuit extensions for floats, heat sensor and seal sensor circuitry. (Explosion proof pumps only. 3. High level alarm light (Flashing) 4. High level alarm hom with push to silence switch. 5. Dry contacts for telemetry of alarm conditions 6. Elapsed time meter (per pump) 7. Seal failure light 8. Anti-condensate heater (50 watt) with thermostat 9. Heat sensor - manual reset 10. Phase failure protection (3 phase only) 11. Lead pump selector switch 12. Lightning suppresser 13. Lag pump on time delay (15-20 seconds) hour time clock, adjustable to 15 minute intervals to control pump operation volt convenience outlet (and 220 volt for 220 volt, 1 phase pump station) 16. Cycle counter 17. Swing dead front door with fused disconnect 18. Submersible transducers, cables, and appurtenances shall be supplied by electrician DUPLEX "Q" CONTROL PANEL Page 3 of3

186

187 16447 AIR COMPRESSOR WITH TANK PART 1 -GENERAL a. Application for this air compressor system is to be utilized as part of the pneumatic system in the main building. b. The aeromod has compressor and complete pneumatic controls system. The oxidation ditch only has this compressor and not any pneumatic controls in main building. For either process, the pneumatic system is required for the U.V. system and belt press if necessary. c. The manufacturer shall be Westward Modei3JR85, Greg Berglund Company (GBC) or equivalent and shall be submitted with the UV equipment and approved by the UV system manufacturer. d. No air piping required beyond dryer except for five feet 1i-inch black iron pipe with shut off valve and male quick connect adapter for the oxidation ditch system. The Aeromod will require complete pneumatic system as part of the process as specified. Two air compressors in main building are not required. PART 2- SYSTEM DESCRIPTION a. The compressor shall be of cast iron construction and motor running power shall be 5 Hp. Compressor shall hold approximately 1 quart of synthetic oil. System shall be 460 v/30 volts single phase with a current draw of 15/7.5 amps. b. Free flow air shall be approximately 4.9 cfm at 125 psi and 5.5 cfm at 90 psi. Maximum working pressure shall be 125 psi. c. Tank capacity shall be approximately 60 gallons, shall be Type H-horizontal or vertical with approximate dimensions of 60-inches long, 26.5 inches high and 20-inches wide. d. Outlet fitting sizes shall be Y4 inch NPT. PART 3- INSTALLATION a. Contractor shall install the air compressor system including piping fittings, dryer, filter, hoses and appurtenances according to the manufacturer. b. The compressor shall be integrated into the operation of the UV system according to the UV system manufacturer. PART 4- START-UP AND WARRANTY a. Manufacturer shall provide one trip to verify all equipment is properly installed and operational. b. Warranty shall be standard one year full warranty on the compressor, tank, motor or equipment AIR COMPRESSOR WITH TANK Page 1 of 1

188

189 SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1- GENERAL a. SUMMARY 1. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kv A: A. Distribution transformers. b. ACTION SUBMITTALS 1. Product Data: For each product indicated. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and weights. A. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. c. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 1. Field quality-control test reports. d. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and maintenance data. e. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Comply with IEEE C , "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." PART 2 -PRODUCTS a. MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: A. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 1 o 3

190 B. General Electric Company. C. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. D. SquareD; Schneider Electric. b. GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 1. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. 2. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. 3. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. A Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. B. Coil Material: Copper. c. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 1. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL Cores: One leg per phase. 3. Interior Enclosures: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2 unless noted otherwise on drawings. 4. Exterior Enclosures: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R unless noted otherwise on drawings. 5. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. A Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray. 6. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kv A: None. 7. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kva: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity. 8. Taps for Transformers 25 kv A and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity. 9. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg Crise above 40 deg C ambient temperature. 10. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kva and Larger: A Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. B. Tested according to NEMA TP K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 2 o 3

191 A. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor. B. Indicate value ofk-factor on transformer nameplate. 12. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets. d. IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 1. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate. Nameplates are specified in Section "Electrical Identification." PART 3 -EXECUTION a. INSTALLATION 1. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer. b. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Perform tests and inspections. 2. Tests and Inspections: A. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NET A Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. B. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections. a. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration. b. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action. c. ADJUSTING 1. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results. 2. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. END OF SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page3 of3

192

193 16482A MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS- LOW VOLTAGE PART 1- GENERAL 1. SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish and install the motor control centers as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 2. RELATED SECTIONS a. Section Circuit Breakers and Fusible Switches b. Section Motor Starters and Overload Relays - Low Voltage c. Section 16483A, B, C, & D- Adjustable Frequency Drives d. Section 16671A- Transient Voltage Surge Suppression e. Section Microprocessor-Based Metering Equipment f. Section Electric Control Devices g. Section Protective Relays h. Section Logic Controllers i. Section Power Management Systems and Products 3. REFERENCES The Motor Control Centers and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards ofnema, ANSI and UL SUBMITTALS- FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL a. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Front view elevation 3. Floor plan 4. Top view 5. Unit wiring diagrams 6. Nameplate schedule 7. Starter and component schedule 8. Conduit entry/exit locations 16482A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES- LOW VOLTAGE Page 1 of24

194 9. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 10. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current c. Interrupting ratings 11. Cable terminal sizes 12. Product data sheets b. Where applicable the following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Busway connection 2. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies 3. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations 5. SUBMITTALS- FOR CONSTRUCTION The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed m Paragraph 1.04, and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process 2. Unit wiring diagrams 3. Certified production test reports 4. Installation information 5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details as specified 6. QUALIFICATIONS a. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. b. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. c. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. I 6482A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES- LOW VOLTAGE Page 2 of24

195 d. Provide Seismic tested equipment as follows: 1. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified bv actual seismic testing to meet all applicable seismic requirements of the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) Site Classification * [A] [B] [C] [D]. The site coefficients Fa= * [0.8] [0.9] [1.0], Fv = * [0.8] [1.0] [1.3] [1.4] [1.5], and spectral response accelerations of Ss = * [10] [20] [30] [50] [60] [70] [80] [90] [100] [125] [150] [200] [256]%g, SI = * [10] [20] [30] [50] [60] [70] [80] [90] [100] [124]%g are used. The test response spectrum shall be based upon a 5% damping factor, and a peak (Sos) of at least *[0.5] [1.0] [1.5] [2.0] [2.5]g's (3-12 Hz) applied at the base of the equipment in the horizontal direction. The forces in the vertical direction shall be at least 66% of those in the horizontal direction. The tests shall cover a frequency range from 1 to 1OOHz. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer and based upon testing of representative equipment. Equipment certification acceptance criteria shall be based upon the ability for the equipment to be returned to service immediately after a seismic event within the above requirements without the need for repairs. OR 1. The manufacturer shall certify the equipment based upon a dynamic and/or static structural computer analvsis of the entire assembly structure and its components, provided it is based upon actual seismic testing from similar equipment. The analysis shall be based upon all applicable seismic requirements of the 2006 International Building Code (IBC) Site Classification* [A] [B] [C] [D], site Coefficient Fa=* [0.8] [0.9] [1.0], Fv = * [0.8] [1.0] [1.3] [1.4] [1.5], and spectral response accelerations of Ss = * [10] [20] [30] [50] [60] [70] [80] [90] [100] [125] [150] [200] [256]%g, S 1 = * [10] [20] [30] [50] [60] [70] [80] [90] [100] [124]%g. The analysis shall be based upon a 5% damping factor, and a peak (Sos) of at least *[0.5] [1.0] [1.5] [2.0] [2.5]g's (3-12Hz), applied at the base of the equipment in the horizontal direction. The forces in the vertical direction shall be at least 66% of those in the horizontal direction. The analysis shall cover a frequency range from 1 to 1OOHz. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the equipment manufacture and based upon testing of representative equipment. Equipment certification acceptance criteria shall be based upon the ability for the equipment to be returned to service immediately after a seismic event within the above requirements without the need for repairs. 2. The following minimum mounting and installation guidelines shall be met, unless specifically modified by the above referenced standards. a. The Contractor shall provide equipment anchorage details, coordinated with the equipment mounting provision, prepared and stamped by a licensed civil engineer in the state. Mounting recommendations shall be provided by the manufacturer based upon the above criteria to verify the seismic design of the equipment. b. The equipment manufacturer shall certify that the equipment can withstand, that is, function following the seismic event, including both vertical and lateral required response spectra as specified in above codes. c. The equipment manufacturer shall document the requirements necessary for proper seismic mounting of the equipment. Seismic qualification shall be considered achieved when the capability of the equipment, meets or exceeds the specified response spectra A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES- LOW VOLTAGE Page 3 of24

196 7. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS The motor control centers shall bear a UL label. [Certified copies of production test reports shall be supplied demonstrating compliance with these standards when requested by the Engineer.] 8. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 9. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped and shall include instruction leaflets, instruction bulletins and renewal parts lists where applicable, for the complete assembly and each major component. PART 2-PRODUCTS 1. MANUFACTURERS a. Eaton products (Eaton/Cutler Hammer Products) b. c. The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specifications and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2. RATINGS The Motor Control Center(s) shall be 600-volt class suitable for operation on a three-phase, 60Hz system. the system operating voltage and number of wires shall be as indicated on the drawings. 3. CONSTRUCTION a. Motor Control Center(s) shall be equal to Eaton type F2100 design. b. Structures shall be totally enclosed, dead-front, free-standing assemblies. They shall be 90-inches high and [ 16-inches] [21-inches] deep for front -mounted units and 21-inches deep for back-to-hack mounted units. Structures shall contain a horizontal wireway at the top [9] [15] inches tall, isolated from the horizontal bus via metal barriers and shall be readily accessible through a hinged cover. Structures shall also contain a horizontal wireway at the bottom [9] [3] inches tall that is open to the full rear of the structure. Adequate space for conduit and wiring to enter the top or bottom shall be provided without structural interference A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES -LOW VOLT AGE Page 4 of24

197 c. Compartments for mounting control units shall be incrementally arranged such that not more than [six (6)] [twelve (12)] Size 1 or Size 2 starters for front-mounted only] [[eleven (11)] [twenty-three (23)] Size 1 or Size 2 starters for back-to-hack] can be mounted within each vertical structure. Guide rails shall be provided. d. A vertical wireway with minimum of 35 square inches of cross-sectional area shall be adjacent to each vertical unit and shall be covered by a hinged door. Wireways shall contain steel rod cable supports. e. All full voltage starter units through NEMA Size 5 and all feeder breakers through 400 Amp shall be of the draw-out type. Draw-out provisions shall include a positive guide rail system and stab shrouds to absolutely ensure alignment of stabs with the vertical bus. Draw-out units shall have a tin-plated stab assembly for connection to the vertical bus. No wiring to these stabs shall extend outside of the draw-out unit. Interior of all units shall be painted white for increased visibility. Units shall be equipped with sidemounted, positive latch pull-apart type control terminal blocks rated 600 volts. Knockouts shall be provided for the addition of future terminal blocks. In addition, a master terminal block, when Type C wiring is specified, shall be draw-out and shall be located in the [top] [bottom] wireway, readily accessible through a hinged cover. All control wire to be [14 gauge] [16 gauge] minimum. f. All draw-out units shall be secured by a spring-loaded, quarter turn, indicating type fastening device located at the top front of the unit. With the exception of the dual-mounted units, each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front door. g. An operating mechanism shall be mounted on the primary disconnect of each starter unit. It shall be mechanically interlocked with the unit door to prevent access, unless the disconnect is in the "OFF" position. A defeater shall be provided to bypass this interlock. With the door open, an interlock shall be provided to prevent inadvertent closing of the disconnect. A second interlock shall be provided to prevent removal or reinsertion of the unit while in the "ON" position. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in the "OFF" position with up to three (3) padlocks with the door open or closed. In addition, means shall be provided to padlock the unit in a partially withdrawn position with the stabs free of the vertical bus. 4. BUS a. Each structure shall contain a main horizontal [tin-plated copper] [silver-plated copper] bus, with minimum ampacity of [600 amperes] [800 amperes] [1200 amperes] [1600 amperes] [2000 amperes] [2500 amperes] [3200 amperes] or as shown on the drawings. The horizontal bus shall be rated at [65] [50] degrees C temperature rise over a 40 degrees C ambient in compliance with UL standards. Vertical bus feeding unit compartments shall be tin-plated copper and shall be securely bolted to the horizontal main bus. All joints shall be front-accessible for ease of maintenance. The vertical bus shall have a minimum rating of [600 amperes for back-to-hack mounted units] [600 amperes] [800 amperes] [1200 amperes] or as shown on the drawings. Both vertical and horizontal bus shall be fully rated; but shall not be tapered. Vertical bus shall not be reduced rated via center feeding, and be fully rated, top and bottom, from centerline bus. b. The vertical bus shall be completely isolated and insulated by means of a labyrinth design barrier. It shall effectively isolate the vertical buses to prevent any fault-generated gases to pass from one phase to another. The vertical bus shall include a shutter mechanism that will allow the unit stabs to engage the vertical bus every 6 inches and provide complete isolation of the vertical bus when a unit is removed A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES -LOW VOLT AGE Page 5 of24

198 OR b. Isolation of the vertical bus compartment from the unit compartment shall be by means of a full height insulating barrier. This barrier shall be a single sheet of glass-reinforced polyester with cutouts to allow the unit stabs to engage the vertical bus every 6 inches. Provide snap-in covers for all unused openings. c. Buses shall be braced for [65,000] [100,000] amperes RMS symmetrical. d. A [tin-plated] [silver-plated] copper ground bus shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the motor control center. The ground bus shall be located in the [top] [bottom] horizontal wireway. e. Each structure shall contain tin-plated vertical ground bus rated 300 amperes. The vertical ground bus shall be directly connected to the horizontal ground bus via a tin-plated copper connector. Units shall connect to the vertical via a tin-plated copper stab. 5. WIRINGffERMINATIONS Wiring shall be NEMA Class [I] [II], Type [A] [B] [C]. 6. MOTOR CONTROLLERS a. Combination Starter: Combination starter units shall be full-voltage non-reversing, unless otherwise shown, and shall utilize Eaton type HMCP Motor Circuit Protectors. Each combination unit shall be rated [65,000] [100,000] AIC symmetrical at 480 Volt. The HMCP shall provide adjustable magnetic protection and be adjustable to 1700% motor nameplate full load current to comply with NEC requirements. All HMCP combination starter units shall have a "tripped" position on the unit disconnect and a push-to-test button on the HMCP. Type HMCP motor circuit protectors through size 4 shall include transient override feature for motor inrush current. [HMCP shall be used to provide IEC Type 2 coordination to 100,000 amperes] b. Combination Starter: Combination starter units shall be full-voltage non-reversing, unless shown otherwise utilizing fusible switches. OR Fusible switches shall be quick-make, quick-break and shall accept Class R dimension fuses and the combination shall safely interrupt 100,000 amperes. Fusible combination starters shall provide IEC Type 2 coordination to 100,000 amperes. c. Motor Starters: 1. Magnetic starters through NEMA Size 9 shall be equipped with double-break silver alloy contacts. The starter must have straight-through wiring. Each starter shall have a minimum of one ( 1) normally open auxiliary contact 2. Coils shall be of molded construction through NEMA Size 9. All coils to be color-coded through size 5 and permanently marked with voltage, frequency and part number 16482A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES -LOW VOLT AGE Page 6 of24

199 3. Overload relays shall be an ambient compensated bimetallic-type with interchangeable heaters, calibrated for 1.0 and 1.15 service factor motors. Electrically isolated normally open and normally closed contacts shall be provided on the relay. Visual trip indication shall be standard. A test trip feature shall be provided for ease of troubleshooting and shall be conveniently operable without removing components or the motor starter. Overload to have (+/-) 24% adjustability, single-phase sensitivity, isolated alarm contact, and manual or automatic reset. 3. Solid-State Overload Relay C440 OR a. Provide a solid-state overload relay for protection of the motors. The relay shall be Eaton C440 or approved equal. b. The overload relay shall provide high accuracy through the use of state-of-the-art microelectronic packaging technology. The relay shall be suitable for application with NEMA Size 1 through Size 7 motor starters. c. The overload relay shall be modular in design, be an integral part of a family of relays to provide a choice of levels of protection, be designed to directly replace existing electromechanical overload relays, and be listed under UL Standard 508. d. The overload relay shall have the following features: 1. Self-powered 2. Class loa, 10, 20, or 30 selectable tripping characteristics 3. Manual or automatic reset 4. Available 24 VDC, 24 VAC, or 120 Vac Electronic reset 5. Reset capabilities through onboard fieldbus 6. Selectable (On/Oft) Phase loss protection. The relay shall trip in 10 seconds or less under phase loss condition 7. Selectable (On/Oft) Phase Imbalance protection. The relay shall trip in 10 seconds or less under phase imbalance condition. 8. Visible trip indication 9. One normally open and one normally closed isolated auxiliary contact 10. Test button that operates the normally closed contact 11. Test trip function that trips both the normally and normally closed contacts 12. A current adjustment range of 5:1 or greater 16482A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES- LOW VOLT AGE Page 7 of24

200 13. Available embedded, selectable (On/Off) Ground fault protection. Relay shall trip when ground fault is detected at 50% of full load ampere setting 14. An LED that provides self-diagnostic information 15. An LED that aids in commissioning by indicating running current is too high compared to the FLA dial 16. Available Modbus, DeviceNet, Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP or Profibus Communication 17. Available additional Inputs and Outputs (4 in and 2 out additional). Inputs shall be 120 V ac, or 24 VDC, and outputs shall be discrete relay outputs 18. Diagnostic Trip Information indicating a specific trip on either ground fault, phase loss, phase imbalance, or thermal 19. When using any of the available fieldbus the relay shall be capable of providing the following data monitoring: 4. Solid-State Overload Relay- C441 a. Individual Phase Currents b. Average RMS Current c. Thermal Capacity d. % Phase unbalance e. GF Current f. Line Frequency g. Relay settings h. Contactor Status OR a. Where indicated on the drawings, use a microprocessor-based Overload Relay (OLR) in each starter and/or where indicated on the drawings for protection, control, diagnostics and monitoring of the motors. The OLR shall be Eaton type C441 (Motor Insight) overload and monitoring relay. The OLR shall meet UL 1053, UL 508, CUL and CSA, and IEC standards. b. The OLR shall not require external current transformers for motor applications from 1 to 90 amperes FLA. Where larger motors are involved, external current transformers shall be used. c. The OLR shall be rated for application of 660V AC and less A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES -LOW VOLT AGE Page 8 of24

201 d. The OLR shall have the following motor control functions: 1. 1-Fault relay, Form B, NC contact with a rating code ofb300 per UL !-Programmable Auxiliary Relay, Form A, NO contact with a rating code of B300 per UL Programmable auxiliary relay allows for user defined fault identification, fault alarming and fault prioritization, including all protection faults including but not limited to: ground fault, jam, phase imbalance, high and low power, 4.!-External remote reset allowing for a 120VAC wired remote reset 5. 2-Trip & Reset status indicating LEDs Door mounted remote display manual reset button Door mounted remote display Manual trip button e. The OLR shall be capable of accommodating external current transformers with ranges from 150:5, 300:5, and 600:5 amperes through a settable CT multiplier on the device for FLAs above 90 amps. f. The OLR shall draw its control power from separate source 120 V AC supply not requiring line power to operate it. The OLR shall be suitable for between 4 7 Hz and 63 Hz. g. The OLR shall have selectable trip classes from 5-30; stepped by ones. h. The OLR shall be equipped with a dedicated door mounted operator-interface (OI)/ display interface panel. The OI shall have a seven-segment 3-digit LED display for control, programming, monitoring, diagnostic and alarming functions. i. The overload relay shall be completely configurable without the use of any proprietary software tool j. The overload relay shall be completely configurable through the use of available communications/industrial network k. The OLR relay shall have a minimum of a 10-fault history stored in a non-volatile memory accessible locally on the device without the use of communications I. The OLR relay shall have a minimum of a 10-fault history stored in a non-volatile memory accessible remotely through the use of communications/industrial network m. The OLR shall annunciate the following conditions and allow for configuration within the ranges listed: 16482A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES -LOW VOLT AGE Page 9 of24

202 1. Motor Protection consisting of: a. Thermal overload (FLAs 1-90 without external CTs, up to 540 amps with external CTs) b. Jam, Stall and Current Level Alarming (Settable from % of FLA, or OFF) c. Current unbalance (Settable from 1-30%, or OFF) d. Current phase loss (60% fixed, or OFF) e. Ground fault (Settable as low as 3 amps to 0.15 amps dependent on the number of wire passes through the current transformers, or OFF) f. Phase rotation/reversal (Settable as OFF, ACB, ABC) 2. Load protection consisting of: a. Under-current (settable from 1-30%) b. Low power (kw) (configurable based on range of device) c. High power (kw) (configurable based on range of device) 3. Line Protection consisting of: a. Over-voltage (settable to 10% above OLR rated voltage) b. Under-voltage (settable to 15% below OLR rated voltage) c. Voltage phase unbalance (settable from 1-30%) d. All Line Protection and Ground Fault shall be settable to alarm only mode or trip mode 4. Protection Trip Delays: a. All Motor Protection shall have programmable trip delays by specific trip type from 1-20 seconds b. All Load Protection shall have programmable trip delays by specific trip type from 1-60 seconds c. All Line Protection shall have programmable trip delays by specific trip type from 1-20 seconds n. The OLR shall have the following local advanced monitoring capabilities not requiring communications: 1. Current-Average and per phase RMS 2. Voltage-Average and per phase RMS 3. Power-Motor kw 4. Power Factor 5. Frequency 6. Thermal capacity 16482A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES- LOW VOLT AGE Page 10 of24

203 7. Motor run hours 8. Ground fault current 9. Current unbalance % 10. Voltage unbalance % o. The OLR shall have the following additional monitoring capabilities when using one of its industrial networks/communication modules. 1. Time to restart after a line type fault 2. Time to restart after a motor type fault 3. Time to restart after a load type fault 4. Motor Start Count 5. Overload Relay Status 6. Error Status 7. Trip Reason p. The OLR shall have the ability to perform auto resets based on programmable timers. 1. The OLR shall have a programmable auto reset for all Motor Type Faults, settable from minutes 2. The OLR shall have a programmable auto reset for Thermal Overload only, settable from minutes 3. The OLR shall have a programmable auto reset for Load Type Faults, settable from minutes 4. The OLR shall have the ability to auto reset for Line Type Faults. 5. The OLR shall have the ability to limit the number of auto reset attempts to a number set by the user for Motor Type Faults, and a separate number set for Load Type Faults, after which a manual reset is required. 6. The OLR shall have a programmable restart delay from seconds after a power loss has occurred to ensure a deliberate start of multiple loads in a stepped fashion. 7. The OLR shall have the ability to perform in slow starting high inertia loads, or where a reduced voltage softstarter is being used. 8. The OLR shall have a settable transition time where protection can be disabled during a start time from seconds to accommodate slow starting loads to prevent nuisance tripping. 9. The OLR shall have a definable run current that can be used concurrently with the programmable transition time to ensure a successful start and then enabling all protection. 10. The OLR shall have a dedicated remote-mounted display/operator-interface option (C4411) for use with enclosed control or motor control centers [Type 1 remote display] [Type 12 remote display] [Type 3R remote display] A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES- LOW VOLTAGE Page 11 of24

204 11. The remote display shall be powered from the base unit with no need for control power or a power supply. 12. The base unit shall be able to communicate to the remote display and use one ofthe industrial protocols concurrently. 13. The remote display shall allow for configuration, monitoring, diagnostics, and control. 14. The OLR shall have an optional remote-mounted HMI capable of configuration, monitoring, diagnostics, and control of numerous Motor Insight overload relays. 15. The HMI shall be NEMA 4X rated 16. The OLR shall be equipped with the following optional communication module [Modbus] [Modbus with 1/0] [DeviceNet with I/0] [PROFIBUS with I/0] [Ethernet IP with I/0]. a. All option communication modules capable ofl20 VAC or 24 VDC isolated inputs and form A B300 5 amp rated output relays. b. All option communication modules with 1/0 must have 4 discrete inputs, and 2 discrete outputs. c. Must work with Power X pert Gateway and Power Xpert Software 5. NEMA Size 00 through 2 starters shall be suitable for the addition of at least six ( 6) external auxiliary contacts of any arrangement normally open or normally closed. Size 3 through 8 starters shall be suitable for the addition of up to eight (8) external auxiliary contacts of any arrangement normally open or normally closed 6. Motor starters shall be Eaton FREEDOM Series or approved equal d. Each starter shall be equipped with a fused control power transformer, two (2) indicating lights, Hand Off-Auto (HOA) selector switch, and two (2) normally open contacts, unless otherwise scheduled on the drawings. A unit-mounted device panel shall have space to accommodate six (6) 30 mm oil-tight pilotcontrol devices or indicating ammeters, voltmeters, or elapsed time meters. In order to improve maintenance capabilities, the device panel shall withdraw with the unit. Door-mounted pilot devices are not acceptable. e. Solid-state reduced-voltage starters, Eaton type S811 shall be provided where shown on the contract drawings. The solid-state reduced-voltage starter shall be UL and CSA listed in the motor control center, and consist of an SCR-based power section, logic board and paralleling bypass contactor. The paralleling bypass contactor shall be energized when the motor reaches full speed. Each solid-state reduced voltage starter shall have an addressable communication card capable of transmitting control and diagnostic data over an open network to either a personal computer or Logic Controller via network translator to DeviceNet, MODBUS 485, MODBUS/TCP I ETHERNET/IP, or PROFIBUS DP A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES- LOW VOLTAGE Page 12 of24

205 f. Adjustable frequency drives shall be provided in MCC(s) where scheduled. Adjustable frequency drives shall be Eaton type MVX, MMX and/or SVX 9000 for variable or constant torque loads. Drives for variable torque loads shall be rated a minimum of 110% over-current for one (I) minute. Drives larger than [1] [10] horsepower shall have identical keypads, control terminals and programmable parameters. Drives shall be capable of providing 200% starting torque. Drives over 150 horsepower shall be located next to the main section to reduce bus loading and heating. All controllers shall be combination type and shall include options as specified. Drives shall have communication cards capable of communication using [DeviceNet] [Profibus] [LonWorks] [Modbus RTU] [Interbus S] [SDS].[Modbus TCP] [EtherNet/IP]. Drives shall be capable of using a V/Hz, open loop vector, or closed loop vector control architecture. 7. OVERCURRENT DEVICES a. Circuit Breakers: Individual feeder breakers shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of [65] [100] kaic at rated voltage or as scheduled on the drawings. b. Fusible Switches: Individual feeder switches shall be quick-make, quick-break gang-operated type, utilizing Class [R] [J] fuse clips. The fused switch shall be rated 100 kaic at rated voltage. 8. AUTOMATIC INSULATION TESTER Automatic insulation testers shall be provided for individual MCC motor starter units where indicated on contract documents. The insulation tester shall be rated for 600 V AC, 60 Hz, motor circuits. When equipment motor is de-energized, the automatic insulation tester shall automatically apply a SOOVDC potential at a current-limited, operator-safe, maximum amperage of 200 micro-amperes to "megger" the insulation of the motor windings and the insulation of the circuit between the automatic insulation tester and the motor. The automatic insulation tester shall have a 1 0-second time delay before alarm circuit will activate. The insulation tester shall have an input of 120 VAC, 60Hz and be interlocked with the starter such that the insulation tester will continuously monitor the integrity of the insulation during the period that the equipment motor is de-energized, and upon detection of a leakage current to ground the insulation tester shall provide a visual alarm indication. When the equipment motor is energized, the insulation tester shall be interlocked with the starter to automatically stop testing and be automatically disconnected from the circuit. Insulation tester shall be equipped with 1 (one) Form C latching alarm contact for remote alarm status. Insulation tester shall be provided with a manual reset button and a "test-an" and "alarm" LED display. Automatic insulation tester shall be Eaton Catalog No. MGRDGP500-E. A 2 % analog door-mount meter with a color coded dial and a meg-ohm scale shall be provided for insulation test indication. The meg-ohm meter shall be Eaton Catalog No. MGRDGP500-E VOLTAGE PRESENCE INDICATOR Voltage Presence Indicators shall be provided on the unit door of MCC starter and feeder units as per contract documents. The voltage presence indicator shall be a hardwired voltmeter or voltage detector connected to the load side of the main incoming disconnect, and shall provide a "through-door" visual indication at the MCC unit door of any voltage presence in any individual phase to enable operators to "pre-verify" voltage presence while the MCC unit door is safely closed. The voltage presence indicator shall be equipped with an adapter to enable installation in a 30mm device-panel on the MCC unit or any other standard 30mm pilot device knockout. The voltage presence indicator shall be of potted construction with 6-foot leads and equipped with dual redundant circuitry to ensure reliability. The voltage presence indicator shall also be phase insensitive, UL type 4X listed and have immunity to high surges. The voltage presence indicator shall be Eaton "Voltage Vision " Catalog No. R-3W A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES- LOW VOLTAGE Page 13 of24

206 10. FIELDBUS COMMUNICATIONS a. Devicenet Devices: 1. Motor Control Center assemblies shall be provided with a factory assembled DeviceNet field bus communications network providing direct connectivity between MCC devices and the system controller and/or HMI. 2. The DeviceNet system installed in the MCC shall include a complete and tested cabling system compliant and approved by the ODV A DeviceNet standard. The cabling system shall consist of trunk and drop line cabling including all splice and tap connectors and terminating resistors. The trunk and drop cabling shall be 600 Volt insulation and include electrical shielding as per the standard ODV A DeviceNet specification. Non-standard, non-shielded flat cable will not be accepted. 3. The trunk line shall be installed in the top horizontal wireway of the MCC. The trunk line shall be thick cable as specified by the ODV A standard. Sealed, threaded, and keyed device tap connectors located and mounted in the top horizontal wireway shall "T" off the top wireway to drop cable mounted in each of the vertical wireways. Each DeviceNet device shall have a dedicated drop line connection via a T connector. The drop cable shall be thin cable as specified by the ODV A standard. Each section of motor control shall be connected with sealed, threaded, and keyed device tap connectors located and mounted in the top horizontal wireway. All cabling shall be securely supported and attached to the MCC structure in accordance with the contract drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. DeviceNet communications modules shall be provided at each device interfacing to the DeviceNet field bus. The communications modules shall be installed in the unit device compartment or bucket, and shall be direct-connected to the DeviceNet drop cable. Each device shall be provided with the appropriate factory fabricated cable for interfacing the communications module with the associated DeviceNet device. 5. Port expanders shall be provided where required to permit multiple device communications. The port expander shall be installed in the associated unit device compartment. 6. Motor control centers shall provide required 24 VDC power to adequately supply power to all the devices in the [MCC] [Total System], and shall be sized as shown in drawings. The power supply shall be installed in an MCC unit with a disconnect switch, supplementary protection and a cable tap box to prevent damage to/from other power supplies on the network. 7. Operator interface unit(s) shall be PanelMate [Power] [epro] Series. Operator interface units shall be able to display the following: starter status, three-phase current, control voltage, overload condition (alarm), cause of device trip, operations count, run time, set points, starter description and identification, and system process graphics screens. Operator interface shall have the capability of communicating on the DeviceNet network. b. Profibus Devices: 1. Motor Control Center assemblies shall be provided with a factory assembled PROFIBUS field bus communications network providing direct connectivity between MCC devices and the system controller and/or HMI A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES- LOW VOLT AGE Page 14 of24

207 2. The PROFIBBUS system installed in the MCC shall include a complete and tested cabling system compliant and approved by the PTO standard. The cabling system shall be a daisy chain using PROFIBUS connectors between each PROFIBUS device. The PROFIBUS cabling shall be 600 Volt insulation and include electrical shielding as per the standard PTO specification. Nonstandard, non-shielded cable will not be accepted. 3. Each shipping split of motor control shall be connected with sealed, threaded, and keyed connectors located and mounted in the top horizontal wireway. All cabling shall be securely supported and attached to the MCC structure in accordance with the contract drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. PROFIBUS communications modules shall be provided at each device interfacing to the PROFIBUS field bus. The communications modules shall be installed in the unit device compartment or bucket, and shall be direct-connected to the PROFIBUS communication cable. Each device shall be provided with the appropriate factory fabricated cable for interfacing the communications module with the associated PROFIBUS device. 5. Port expanders shall be provided where required to permit multiple device communications. The port expander shall be installed in the associated unit device compartment. 6. Motor control centers shall provide required 24 VDC power to adequately supply power to all the devices in the [MCC] [Total System], and shall be sized as shown in drawings. The power supply shall be installed in an MCC unit with a disconnect switch, supplementary protection and a cable tap box to prevent damage to/from other power supplies on the network. 7. Operator interface unit( s) shall be PanelMate [Power] [ epro] Series. Operator interface units shall be able to display the following: starter status, three-phase current, control voltage, overload condition (alarm), cause of device trip, operations count, run time, set points, starter description and identification, and system process graphics screens. Operator interface shall have the capability of communicating on the PROFIBUS network. c. Modbus TCP Devices: 1. Motor Control Center assemblies shall be provided with a factory assembled Modbus TCP field bus communications network providing direct connectivity between MCC devices and the system controller and/or HMI. 2. Motor control centers shall provide a required Ethernet 10/100 auto negotiate industrial switch per lineup. The Ethernet switch shall have sufficient ports available to connect to each Modbus TCP device and have at least 2 open ports for a customer connection and a PC connection for maintenance. 3. The Modbus TCP system installed in the MCC shall include a complete and tested cabling system. The cabling system shall be Cat 5 and consist of home run connections from the device to a switch located in the MCC. Non-standard, non-shielded cable will not be accepted. 4. All cabling shall be securely supported and attached to the MCC structure in accordance with the contract drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES -LOW VOLT AGE Page 15 of24

208 5. Modbus TCP communications modules shall be provided at each device interfacing to the Modbus TCP field bus. The communications modules shall be installed in the unit device compartment or bucket, and shall be direct-connected to the Modbus TCP Ethernet cable. Each device shall be provided with the appropriate factory fabricated cable for interfacing the communications module with the associated Modbus TCP device. 6. Operator interface unit(s) shall be PanelMate [Power] [epro] Series. Operator interface units shall be able to display the following: starter status, three-phase current, control voltage, overload condition (alarm), cause of device trip, operations count, run time, set points, starter description and identification, and system process graphics screens. Operator interface shall have the capability of communicating on the Mod bus TCP network. d. Modbus Serial Devices: 1. Motor Control Center assemblies shall be provided with a factory assembled Modbus RTU field bus communications network providing direct connectivity between MCC devices and the system controller and/or HMI. 2. The Modbus RTU system installed in the MCC shall include a complete and tested cabling system compliant and approved by Modbus standard. The cabling system shall be a daisy chain using shielded twisted pair cable between each Modbus RTU device. The Modbus RTU cabling shall be 600 Volt insulation and include electrical shielding, non-standard, non-shielded cable will not be accepted. 3. Each shipping split of motor control shall allow for the Modbus RTU cable to be disconnected for shipment and then reconnected during instillation. All cabling shall be securely supported and attached to the MCC structure in accordance with the contract drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Modbus RTU communications modules shall be provided at each device interfacing to the Modbus RTU field bus. The communications modules shall be installed in the unit device compartment or bucket, and shall be direct-connected to the Modbus RTU communication cable. Each device shall be provided with the appropriate factory fabricated cable for interfacing the communications module with the associated Modbus RTU device. 5. Operator interface unit( s) shall be PanelMate [Power] [ epro] Series. Operator interface units shall be able to display the following: starter status, three-phase current, control voltage, overload condition (alarm), cause of device trip, operations count, run time, set points, starter description and identification, and system process graphics screens. Operator interface shall have the capability of communicating on the Modbus RTU network. e. Ehternet!IP Devices: 1. Motor Control Center assemblies shall be provided with a factory assembled EtherNet/IP field bus communications network providing direct connectivity between MCC devices and the system controller and/or HMI. 2. Motor control centers shall provide required Ethernet 10/100 auto negotiate industrial switch per lineup. The Ethernet switch shall have sufficient ports available to connect to each EtherNet/IP device and have at least 2 open ports for a customer connection and a PC connection for maintenance A MOTOR CONTROL CENTES -LOW VOLTAGE Page 16 of24

16055 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION

16055 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION 16055 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1. SUMMARY This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Protective devices

More information

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Comply with 29 CFR and 29 CFR

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Comply with 29 CFR and 29 CFR September 2012, rev. 00 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. Section Includes: 1.02 Submittals 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control

More information

SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

SECTION ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification

More information

On-Call General Contractor Specifications University of Maryland College Park June 2013

On-Call General Contractor Specifications University of Maryland College Park June 2013 SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division

More information

SECTION (16075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION (16075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 05 53 (16075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA

More information

NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY PROJECT NAME JOB # ISSUED: 03/29/2017

NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY PROJECT NAME JOB # ISSUED: 03/29/2017 SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

More information

SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

More information

SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 260519- LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations

More information

SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division

More information

Weld County Maintenance Facility Natural Gas Vehicle Ungrades

Weld County Maintenance Facility Natural Gas Vehicle Ungrades DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

More information

Security System Renovation Western Reception Diagnostic and Correctional Center, St. Joseph, MO

Security System Renovation Western Reception Diagnostic and Correctional Center, St. Joseph, MO SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL, COMMUNICATIONS AND ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

More information

PHILADELPHIA REGIONAL PORT AUTHORITY VOLUME 2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR VEHICLE PROCESSING FACILITY NAVAL BUSINESS CENTER PHILADELPHIA PA.

PHILADELPHIA REGIONAL PORT AUTHORITY VOLUME 2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR VEHICLE PROCESSING FACILITY NAVAL BUSINESS CENTER PHILADELPHIA PA. PHILADELPHIA REGIONAL PORT AUTHORITY VOLUME 2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR VEHICLE PROCESSING FACILITY NAVAL BUSINESS CENTER PHILADELPHIA PA Prepared By STV Incorporated 205 West Welsh Drive Douglassville, PA 19518

More information

SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) SECTION 26 05 21 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the low voltage power and lighting wiring. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Excavation and backfill

More information

DIVISION 16. ElECTRICAl

DIVISION 16. ElECTRICAl DIVISION 16 ElECTRICAl SECTION 16030 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM STUDIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Short circuit study, protective device evaluation study, protective device coordination

More information

Permit Fairview Municipal Building 55 Anderson Ave. Fairview NJ Issue December 31, 2015

Permit Fairview Municipal Building 55 Anderson Ave. Fairview NJ Issue December 31, 2015 SECTION 26 05 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division

More information

Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. SECTION 260500- COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 2. Sleeve seals. 3. Grout. 4. Common electrical installation requirements.

More information

Section SEALS PAGE DIVISION 16 ~SEALS PAGE ~ 1 PROJECT. Wild Potato Buffet Cherokee Casino Catoosa, OK ENGINEER OF RECORD

Section SEALS PAGE DIVISION 16 ~SEALS PAGE ~ 1 PROJECT. Wild Potato Buffet Cherokee Casino Catoosa, OK ENGINEER OF RECORD SEALS PAGE Section 0001 07 PROJECT Wild Potato Buffet Cherokee Casino Catoosa, OK ENGINEER OF RECORD The following Consultant has provided professional services to the Architect for the referenced project

More information

PROJECT MANUAL FOR THE DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF EMPLOYEE ALARM SYSTEM LOCATED AT

PROJECT MANUAL FOR THE DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF EMPLOYEE ALARM SYSTEM LOCATED AT PROJECT MANUAL FOR THE DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF EMPLOYEE ALARM SYSTEM LOCATED AT ALEXANDRIA RENEW WATER RESOURCE RECOVERY FACILITY 1500 EISENHOWER AVENUE ALEXANDRIA, VIRGINIA 22314 FOR JOHNSON CONTROLS

More information

SECTION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General provisions for Electrical Systems B. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less. C. Wiring connectors. D. Electrical tape. E. Heat shrink tubing. F. Wire pulling

More information

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

A. Product Data: For each type of product. SECTION 260519- LOW-VOLT AGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: I. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Aluminum building wire rated 600 V or less.

More information

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Saratoga Springs / standards / 02-2004 Page - 0 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors, equipment

More information

SECTION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

SECTION ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ac,

More information

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. (816) 373-4878 U1208-01/FAI29-029 (573) 751-2624 SECTION 2 105 17 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the

More information

SECTION C. Section Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional identification requirements for cable tray systems.

SECTION C. Section Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional identification requirements for cable tray systems. SECTION 26 0553 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Identification nameplates and labels. C. Wire and cable markers. D. Voltage markers. E. Underground warning

More information

SECTION PANELBOARDS. A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

SECTION PANELBOARDS. A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the

More information

SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 26 36 23 SPEC WRITER NOTE: Use this section only for NCA projects. Delete between //--// if not applicable to project. Also, delete any other item or paragraph

More information

NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY PROJECT NAME JOB # ISSUED: 11/06/2018

NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY PROJECT NAME JOB # ISSUED: 11/06/2018 SECTION 26 2913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,

More information

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS July Electrical Systems

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS July Electrical Systems SECTION 26 05 54 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Permanent Marking. 6. Underground

More information

Student Services & Classroom Addition. A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

Student Services & Classroom Addition. A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance:

More information

SECTION CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 260519- CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated

More information

SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 26 36 23 This section specifies the furnishing, complete installation, and connection of automatic transfer switches. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Section 14 21 00, ELECTRIC

More information

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance:

More information

SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL

SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 16400 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply

More information

APPENDIX - L INTERNATIONAL RESIDENTIAL CODE ELECTRICAL

APPENDIX - L INTERNATIONAL RESIDENTIAL CODE ELECTRICAL This Appendix (2000 IRC Appendix-L) is produced, copyrighted, and maintained by the National Fire Protection Association Association, all rights reserved. Use of this Appendix is pursuant to license with

More information

SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES State of Alaska Douglas Island Building Section 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED

More information

SECTION PANELBOARDS Painting Wire and Cable Overcurrent Protective Devices.

SECTION PANELBOARDS Painting Wire and Cable Overcurrent Protective Devices. SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. 09900 - Painting. 2. 16120 - Wire and Cable. 3. 16475 - Overcurrent Protective Devices. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance

More information

SECTION DUCTWORK. A. Section Painting: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating.

SECTION DUCTWORK. A. Section Painting: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating. SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Duct cleaning. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Painting: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating. B.

More information

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS July Electrical Systems

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS July Electrical Systems SECTION 26 05 02 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Furnish all labor, material, services and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation,

More information

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. Copyright 2010 AlA MasterSpec Full Length 09/10 SECTION 260519- LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600

More information

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following: SECTION 16415 - TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification

More information

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL: Basic Electrical Materials Methods

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL: Basic Electrical Materials Methods 1. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 1. All conduit and raceway must be 3/4" or larger. Exposed raceway in finished areas shall be in 700 or larger wiremold. Exception: runs to individual devices 10 or less,

More information

PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Specification Number: 26 24 16.06 Product Name: Emergency Lighting Control NQ Circuit Panelboards: 240 Vac, 48 Vdc Maximum SECTION 26 24 16.06 Emergency Lighting Control NQ Circuit Panelboards: 240 Vac,

More information

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,

More information

Title: YALE OFFICE OF FACILITIES PROCEDURE MANUAL Chapter: 01 - Yale Design Standard Division: Electrical Standards

Title: YALE OFFICE OF FACILITIES PROCEDURE MANUAL Chapter: 01 - Yale Design Standard Division: Electrical Standards Change History Date Description of Change Pages / Sections Modified Change Approver Initials 8/1/17 Updated section on Manufacturers 3 1. 6/15/16 Updated division section from 16120 to 26 05 00, - mgl44

More information

SECTION GENERATOR PARALLELING CONTROLS

SECTION GENERATOR PARALLELING CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 26 23 13 GENERATOR PARALLELING CONTROLS SPEC WRITER NOTE: Delete between // -- // if not applicable to project. Also delete any other item or paragraph not applicable

More information

KINGS COUNTY JAIL EXPANSION PHASE III COUNTY OF KINGS SECTION

KINGS COUNTY JAIL EXPANSION PHASE III COUNTY OF KINGS SECTION SECTION 237433, PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to

More information

Wayne State University WSU Project No Chatsworth Tower Apts. Misc. Bldg. Upgrades DSD Project No

Wayne State University WSU Project No Chatsworth Tower Apts. Misc. Bldg. Upgrades DSD Project No SECTION 213113 - ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division

More information

2016 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved July 2016 SECTION FIBER OPTIC DATA NETWORK

2016 CDM Smith All Rights Reserved July 2016 SECTION FIBER OPTIC DATA NETWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK SECTION 27 12 23 FIBER OPTIC DATA NETWORK A. Furnish, install, terminate, and test all fiber optic equipment and cabling necessary for a complete and functional data highway

More information

MASTERSPEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 28 ELEC. SAFETY & SECURITY SECTION CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

MASTERSPEC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 28 ELEC. SAFETY & SECURITY SECTION CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 280513 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Coaxial cabling. 2. RS-232 cabling. 3. RS-485 cabling. 4. Low-voltage control

More information

Request for Proposals Steel Passenger Boarding Bridge Lt. Paul Baer Terminal Fort Wayne International Airport

Request for Proposals Steel Passenger Boarding Bridge Lt. Paul Baer Terminal Fort Wayne International Airport Addendum #1 111 W. Berry St. Suite 200 Fort Wayne, IN 46802 P: 260.424.7200 F: 260.424.7301 hochassoc.com November 7, 2014 Request for Proposals Steel Passenger Boarding Bridge Lt. Paul Baer Terminal Fort

More information

SECTION P01 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS - A-SERIES

SECTION P01 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS - A-SERIES PART 1 GENERAL A. The requirements of the Contract, Division 1, and Division 16 apply to work in this Section. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lighting and appliance panelboards 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. 16475,

More information

Element D Services Electrical

Element D Services Electrical PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 OVERVIEW A. This Section includes design standards and requirements for electrical service and distribution. This is a design standard and is not intended to be used as a Specification.

More information

UNIVERSITY SERVICES ANNEX James Madison University Harrisonburg, Virginia State Project Code: Architect s Project Number:

UNIVERSITY SERVICES ANNEX James Madison University Harrisonburg, Virginia State Project Code: Architect s Project Number: SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions of the Contract and of the Contract Documents apply to this Section. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Operating

More information

A. Shop Drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

A. Shop Drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following: SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The Conditions of the Contract and applicable requirements of Divisions 0 and 1 and Section 26 00 01, Electrical

More information

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings. DIVISION 21 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, sleeves, escutcheons, seals, and connections for sprinkler systems. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

More information

ADDENDUM #3 DATE: August 8, 2018 Page 1 of 1. The Curators of the University of Missouri

ADDENDUM #3 DATE: August 8, 2018 Page 1 of 1. The Curators of the University of Missouri ADDENDUM #3 DATE: August 8, 2018 Page 1 of 1 TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ENTITLED: PROJECT MANUAL FOR: Women s and Children s Hospital New Water Service Main PROJECT NUMBER: CP172631 ADVERTISEMENT DATE: July

More information

SECTION DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

SECTION DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Ul611-0l SECTION 211316- DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PARTl-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification

More information

SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels B. Wire and cable markers C. Conduit markers 1.2 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical

More information

A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure. SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Fire-protection valves. 3. Fire-department connections. 4. Sprinklers.

More information

Union County Vocational - Technical Schools Scotch Plains, New Jersey

Union County Vocational - Technical Schools Scotch Plains, New Jersey SECTION 220533 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing piping heat tracing for freeze prevention, domestic hot-water-temperature maintenance, and

More information

5. Identification products.

5. Identification products. Essex County College - West Essex Campus Addition And Renovations dib # 54292 / 11-14 [SECTION 260523- CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general

More information

E I Delmar Cobble MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

E I Delmar Cobble MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical demolition. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SECTION 26 0501 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION A. Section 01 7000- Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional requirements

More information

SECTION (16140) - WIRING DEVICES

SECTION (16140) - WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 27 26 (16140) - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, Connectors, Switches, and Finish Plates. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 00 31 13.43 (00370) -

More information

SECTION FAN COIL UNITS

SECTION FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections:

More information

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS East Point City Hall 1 Electrical Specifications- TOC ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION DESCRIPTION 260499 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS

More information

A. Connected to the equipment ground B. Bonded to the box C. Connected to nearest water pipe D. Connected to a ground rod

A. Connected to the equipment ground B. Bonded to the box C. Connected to nearest water pipe D. Connected to a ground rod Journeyman and Master Common Exam 2 1 The grounding terminal of a grounding-type receptacle installed in a metal box shall be? A. Connected to the equipment ground B. Bonded to the box C. Connected to

More information

SPECIFICATION DELETED SECTION CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS

SPECIFICATION DELETED SECTION CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS SECTION 23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENT A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification

More information

UPTON TOWN HALL RENOVATIONS

UPTON TOWN HALL RENOVATIONS SECTION 260500 - GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK (Part of Work of Section 260001 - ELECTRICAL WORK, Filed Sub-Bid Required) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Attention is directed to the

More information

H Replace Emergency Generator Delmina Woods Youth Center Gentry Residential Treatment Center

H Replace Emergency Generator Delmina Woods Youth Center Gentry Residential Treatment Center H1401-01 Replace Emergency Generator Delmina Woods Youth Center SECTION 260519- LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of

More information

SECTION WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

SECTION WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SECTION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification

More information

Brown University Revised June 29, 2012 Facilities Design & Construction Standards SECTION ELECTRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA

Brown University Revised June 29, 2012 Facilities Design & Construction Standards SECTION ELECTRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Background SECTION 26 00 10- ELECTRICAL DESIGN CRITERIA A. Brown University maintains it own campus electrical distribution system which serves the majority of the buildings and facilities

More information

NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY PROJECT NAME JOB # ISSUED: 03/29/2017

NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY PROJECT NAME JOB # ISSUED: 03/29/2017 SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,

More information

MEDIUM, LOW AND CONTROL VOLTAGE CABLES

MEDIUM, LOW AND CONTROL VOLTAGE CABLES Related Sections U-M Design Guideline Sections: 260800 - Electrical Acceptance Tests Products Medium Voltage Primary Cables Primary power distribution cable shall be single conductor stranded copper, with

More information

SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. A. This Section includes basic electrical materials and methods including:

SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. A. This Section includes basic electrical materials and methods including: SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes basic electrical materials and methods including: 1. Conduit, fittings and accessories. 2. Wire,

More information

VACUUM BREAKER MEDIUM VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

VACUUM BREAKER MEDIUM VOLTAGE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES Part One General 1.01 Scope A. It is the intent of this specification to provide a medium voltage automatic transfer system. B. All components, testing and services specified and required for a complete

More information

SECTION ISOLATED POWER SYSTEMS

SECTION ISOLATED POWER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION SECTION 26 20 11 ISOLATED POWER SYSTEMS SPEC WRITER NOTE: Delete between //---// if not applicable to project. Also, delete any other item or paragraph not applicable to

More information

CORFLEX TYPE MC-HL POWER, CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION CABLES

CORFLEX TYPE MC-HL POWER, CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION CABLES CORFLEX TYPE MC-HL POWER, CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION CABLES CORFLEX TYPE MC-HL POWER, CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION CABLES INDEX Corflex MC-HL Instrumentation - Pairs and Triads (0V*)... 1 - CORFLEX Cables

More information

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS This Standard is for guidance only. SECTION PUMPS

DENVER PUBLIC SCHOOLS DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS This Standard is for guidance only. SECTION PUMPS PART 0 A/E INSTRUCTIONS 0.01 Design Requirements A. Pumping system design 1. A primary-secondary pumping system is preferred. Redundant pipes are required for chillers and boilers. 2. Select pumps to operate

More information

CONTENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

CONTENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES CONTENTS AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents 1.2 Summary 1.3 References 1.4 Quality Assurance 1.5 Submittals 1.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.7 Instructions And Training

More information

SECTION LOW VOLTAGE POWER PANELBOARDS - SPECTRA

SECTION LOW VOLTAGE POWER PANELBOARDS - SPECTRA PART 1 GENERAL A. The requirements of the Contract, Division 1, and Division 16 apply to work in this Section. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Low voltage power panelboards 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES

More information

1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers.

1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers. September 2012, rev. 00 26 2416 Panelboards PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. Section includes: 1.02 Definitions 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load

More information

SECTION 2 NEC REFERENCES SECTION 1 LOW-VOLTAGE AND POWER- LIMITED SYSTEMS...1. CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Introduction...35

SECTION 2 NEC REFERENCES SECTION 1 LOW-VOLTAGE AND POWER- LIMITED SYSTEMS...1. CHAPTER 1 GENERAL Introduction...35 SECTION 1 LOW-VOLTAGE AND POWER- LIMITED SYSTEMS...1 Overview of Low-Voltage and Power-Limited Systems...3 Chapter 4 Equipment for General Use...3 Chapter 5 Special Occupancies...3 Chapter 6 Special Equipment...4

More information

THE JAMES RUSHTON EARLY LEARNING AND FAMILY SUCCESS CENTER #2616 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION

THE JAMES RUSHTON EARLY LEARNING AND FAMILY SUCCESS CENTER #2616 ISSUE FOR CONSTRUCTION SECTION 21 1301- FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes fire-suppression piping and equipment for the following building systems: 1. Wet-pipe, fire-suppression

More information

occurs and be cause for termination of the contract.

occurs and be cause for termination of the contract. 1.02 SUBMITTALS occurs and be cause for termination of the contract. CITY OF MIAMI CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS PROGRAM A. Manufacturer s Data: 1. Complete list of materials to be furnished under this section.

More information

RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS CHECKLISTS

RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS CHECKLISTS RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS CHECKLISTS Key Questions for Residential Inspections 1. What wiring methods will be used, and are the wiring methods suitable for the conditions? 2. Will multiwire branch

More information

TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL RULES CHAPTER 2 WIRING AND PROTECTION... 51

TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 GENERAL RULES CHAPTER 2 WIRING AND PROTECTION... 51 TABLE OF CONTENTS About This Textbook...xi How to Use the National Electrical Code... 1 Article 90 Introduction to the National Electrical Code... 7 90.1 Purpose of the NEC... 7 90.2 Scope of the NEC...

More information

CubeSmart Gulf Breeze Storage AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

CubeSmart Gulf Breeze Storage AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SECTION 21 0000 AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. FBC (Florida Building Code 2015) 2. FBC (Florida Fire Code 2015) 3. NFPA #13R (Standard for

More information

SPRINKLERS TABLE OF CONTENTS

SPRINKLERS TABLE OF CONTENTS SPRINKLERS TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SECTION 211313 - WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,

More information

UNIVERSITY OF SOUTH FLORIDA POLYTECHNIC SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY BUILDING LAKELAND, FLORIDA DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION INDEX

UNIVERSITY OF SOUTH FLORIDA POLYTECHNIC SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY BUILDING LAKELAND, FLORIDA DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION INDEX UNIVERSITY OF SOUTH FLORIDA POLYTECHNIC LAKELAND, FLORIDA DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SPECIFICATION INDEX SECTION NO. SECTION TITLE 27 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

More information

PANELBOARDS & BUILDING DISTRIBUTION

PANELBOARDS & BUILDING DISTRIBUTION 262416 PANELBOARDS & BUILDING DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards 2. Power panelboards B. Related Sections: 1.02 POLICY 1. CU Standard 260500, Basic

More information

COBB COUNTY SCHOOLS /S&A % BID DOCUMENTS 2/18/11 SECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM

COBB COUNTY SCHOOLS /S&A % BID DOCUMENTS 2/18/11 SECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM SECTION 21 10 00 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CODES A. Work shall conform to NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems, 2002 Edition and NFPA 24 Outside Protection, 2002 Edition. NFPA 14 Standpipe Systems, 2000 Edition and International

More information

M001. Revenue Services ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION SEPTEMBER. 2, East State Parkway Schaumburg, Illinois Do Not Scale Drawings

M001. Revenue Services ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION SEPTEMBER. 2, East State Parkway Schaumburg, Illinois Do Not Scale Drawings 1 T Consultant: NOTES, SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS - MECHANICAL Number Description M001 Vestibule 117 LAN/IT Coffee 115 116 Mail Room 118 114 113 112 Scanning 119 Open Office 101 FIRST FLOOR PLAN - MECHANICAL

More information

C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. SECTION 236426 - ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged, water cooled or air cooled as scheduled, electric-motor-driven, rotary-screw water chillers

More information

SECTION WET AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

SECTION WET AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SECTION 15501 WET AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Wet automatic fire sprinkler systems including fire pump, fire pump controller, alarms, safety devices,

More information

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for detention furniture.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for detention furniture. SECTION 125500-WALL BED SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,

More information

All surfaces shall be restored where surface finish damage is evident. Physical material damage will require replacement of part.

All surfaces shall be restored where surface finish damage is evident. Physical material damage will require replacement of part. General This standard sets forth the minimum requirements for basic electrical materials and methods used in construction on University projects. It is not intended to be used as a complete specification

More information

Informational Bulletin on Mobile office Units Prepared by Mark Hilbert May 17, 2017

Informational Bulletin on Mobile office Units Prepared by Mark Hilbert May 17, 2017 Informational Bulletin on Mobile office Units Prepared by Mark Hilbert May 17, 2017 It has come to the attention of the electrical authorities having jurisdiction (AHJs) at the DOE sites there is inconsistency

More information

C. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Buchtel/Perkins Community Learning Center GPD -2007271.15 OSFC Project # 55-7110-9029425 Phase 3 CLC Package Bidding Documents July 1, 2010 SECTION 15513 CONDENSING BOILERS PART I- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED

More information

Chapter 1 General... 5

Chapter 1 General... 5 About This Textbook...xi About the National Electrical Code...xv About the Authors and Illustrator...xix About the Team...xxi Article 90 Introduction to the National Electrical Code... 1 90.1 Purpose of

More information

Construction Standards Page Exclusively published and distributed by Architectural Computer Services, Inc. (ARCOM) for the AIA

Construction Standards Page Exclusively published and distributed by Architectural Computer Services, Inc. (ARCOM) for the AIA Construction Standards Page 233423-1 Copyright 2009 by The American Institute of Architects (AIA) Exclusively published and distributed by Architectural Computer Services, Inc. (ARCOM) for the AIA Modified

More information